THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 'OTOMETRY 
 GIFT OF 
 
 Dr. Hugh V. Brown 
 
SQUINT 
 
 ITS CAUSES, PATHOLOGY, AND 
 TREATMENT 
 
SQUINT: 
 
 ITS CAUSES, PATHOLOGY 
 AND TREATMENT 
 
 BY 
 
 CLAUD WORTH, F.R.C.S. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA 
 P. BLAKISTON'S SON AND CO. 
 
 1012 WALNUT STREET 
 1906 
 
Add'l 
 GIFT 
 
Re 
 
 OPTOMETRY 
 UBKA- 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 Introduction page i 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 BINOCULAR VISION. 
 
 Binocular vision — Grades of binocular vision — Tests 
 for binocular vision — The normal development of the 
 fusion sense in infancy .... page 7 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 General description of the anomaly — Clinical varie- 
 ties — Suppression of the vision of the deviating eye — 
 Diplopia artificially produced — Nature of diplopia — 
 The amblyopia of convergent squint — The power of 
 central fixation in the deviating eye — False fixation — 
 False macula — Monocular diplopia — Apparent vertical 
 deviation — True vertical deviation — Spurious squint of 
 infants — Spontaneous " cure " of squint — Course of an 
 untreated case of squint — Age of onset of squint — 
 Refractive error in convergent squint — Statistical 
 tables — Relative frequency of squint . . page 25 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE ^ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 Muscle theory — Donder's theory — ^Etiology of con- 
 vergent squint — Defect of the fusion sense the funda- 
 mental cause — Subsidiary causes — Proofs of the Author's 
 contention ....... page 48 
 
 292 
 
vi. CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 AMBLYOPIA, CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED. 
 
 Congenital amblyopia — Acquired amblyopia — 
 Illustrative cases — Amblyopia in cases of convergent 
 squint — Statistical tables .... page 63 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE METHOD OF INVESTIGATING A CASE OF SQUINT. 
 
 History— The character of the squint — Cover test — 
 Mirror test — Diagnosis between squint and paralysis 
 — The power of central fixation — The movements of 
 each eye separately — Dynamic convergence — Vision 
 testing — Snellen's types — The ivory-ball test — The 
 examination of the fusion sense — Measurement of the 
 angle of the deviation — The Deviometer — Maddox 
 tangent scale — Priestley Smith's tape — The perimeter 
 — Estimation of refractive error . . page 78 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE TREATMENT OF CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 The objects of treatment — The means by which 
 these objects may be attained — Optical correction — 
 Spectacles for children and for infants— Occlusion of 
 the fixing eye— Instillation of atropine into the fixing 
 eye only — Fusion training — Operation — Indications for, 
 and choice of, operation — Alternating squints — Occa- 
 sional squints— Vertical deviations . . page 97 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 THE METHOD OF TRAINING THE FUSION SENSE. 
 
 Preliminary remarks — The age at which the fusion 
 sense may be educated — The Amblyoscope— Its illu- 
 minating apparatus — Three classes of object slides — 
 Fusion training— The method of overcoming ^"sup- 
 pression" Simultaneous vision — Fusion of images — 
 Increasing the amplitude of fusion . . page Il8 
 
CONTENTS VII. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 DIVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 Myopic divergent squint — Neuropathic divergent 
 squint — Non-comitant divergent squints other than 
 paralytic — Divergence in extreme myopia — Divergence 
 of blind eyes — Divergence secondary to tenotomy 
 
 page 133 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 TREATMENT OF SQUINT. 
 Illustrative cases page 141 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 HETEROPHORIA. 
 
 Orthophoria — Heterophoria — Methods of testing 
 the muscular balance of the eyes — Esophoria — 
 Exophoria — Hyperphoria — Cyclophoria — Illustrative 
 cases page 164 
 
 Insufficiency of dynamic convergence . page 196 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 OPERATIONS ON THE EXTERNAL OCULAR MUSCLES. 
 
 Advancement of a rectus muscle — The author's 
 advancement operation — Musculo-capsular advance- 
 ment — -Secondary advancements — Tenotomy — Com- 
 plete central tenotomy .... page 201 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Details of cases of congenital amblyopia— Prisms 
 and decentred lenses — Results of fusion training — 
 Results of advancement operations — Details of con- 
 struction of the deviometer — Modifications of the 
 amblyoscope — Advancement forceps . page 210 
 
 INDEX. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 By examining- a very large number of cases 
 of squint, and watching the results of treatment 
 during a number of years, and by investigating 
 the visual functions of normal-sighted people, 
 I have endeavoured to learn the causes and 
 pathology of squint. The methods of treatment 
 which I employ are the outcome of these 
 observations. 
 
 In cases of constant unilateral convergent 
 squint, the usual routine treatment, by glasses 
 and operation, gives extremely unsatisfactory 
 results. In about one-third of these cases, the 
 wearing of glasses causes the eyes, after a time, 
 to become "straight." In the other two-thirds, 
 the deformity may be more or less removed by 
 operation. But, more often than not, the deviat- 
 ing eye becomes very blind, and the acquisition 
 of any sort of binocular vision is quite the 
 exception. 
 
 On the other hand, cases of unilateral squint 
 in which treatment is commenced early and 
 carried out by the methods described in these 
 
pages are nearly always perfectly cured, having 
 good vision in each eye, and good binocular vision. 
 
 Since 1893 I have kept detailed notes of every 
 case of squint which has come under my observa- 
 tion. I have notes of 2,337 squints and hetero- 
 phorias. Of these cases, 1,729 suffered from 
 convergent squint. The cases presented them- 
 selves in the out-patient departments of the West 
 Ham and East London Hospital, the Lough- 
 borough Hospital, and the Royal London 
 Ophthalmic Hospital (Moorfields), and in my 
 private practice. 
 
 I am greatly indebted to Mr. Silcock and 
 Mr. Holmes Spicer for their kindness in allowing 
 me, during a period of nearly four years, to 
 investigate and treat the cases of squint attending 
 their out-patient clinics at Moorfields. 
 
 I wish to thank Mr. R. E. Hanson for valuable 
 assistance in working out the statistics of my cases. 
 
 138, Hurley Street, 
 
 London, IT. 
 May, 1903. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 I take this opportunity to thank my confreres, 
 both at home and abroad, for the very generous 
 reception accorded to the work. 
 
 In preparing- the second edition, nothing has 
 been altered or omitted. But some small addi- 
 tions have been made, and some matters more 
 fully discussed. 
 
 Dr. E. H. Oppenheimer has translated the 
 book into German (for Messrs. Julius Springer 
 and Co., Berlin). 
 
 PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 The third edition contains statistics which 
 give a fair idea of the results which may be 
 expected from the methods of advancement and 
 fusion training described in these pages. 
 
 May, 1906. 
 
SQUINT: 
 
 Its Causes, Pathology and Treatment. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 This chapter contains nothing new. It deals 
 very briefly with certain elementary facts. 
 
 EMMETROPIA is the refractive condition of the 
 normal adult human eye. Rays of light proceeding 
 from a single point on a distant object may, for 
 practical purposes, be regarded as parallel. When 
 these parallel rays enter an emmetropic eye, they 
 undergo refraction as they pass through the refracting 
 media (cornea, aqueous humour, lens, vitreous humour), 
 and are brought to a focus on the retina. Rays from 
 every other point in the distant object are similarly 
 focussed, so that a complete (inverted) image of the 
 object is formed on the retina. The refraction which 
 takes place under these conditions is called the static 
 refraction of the eye. 
 
 Accommodation. — Rays of light which enter the 
 eye from a near object, e.g., a printed page, are sensibly 
 divergent. Now, it is obvious that the static refrac- 
 tion of the normal eye, which exactly suffices to bring 
 parallel rays to a focus on the retina, will not accu- 
 rately focus these divergent rays. To meet this 
 
2 INTRODUCTION 
 
 deficiency, there is a muscle within the eyeball, the 
 ciliary muscle, which, by its contraction, causes the 
 lens to become more convex, more nearly spherical, 
 and so increases its refractive power. This act of 
 increasing the refractive power of the eye is called 
 accommodation, and the additional refraction thus pro- 
 duced is called the dynamic refraction of the eye. 
 
 Presbyopia. — In childhood the lens is very soft 
 and elastic, and is easily made to change its shape 
 under the action of the ciliary muscle, so that children 
 have a very wide range of accommodation. As age 
 advances, the lens gradually becomes more and more 
 firm and incompressible, so that, though distant objects 
 are still perfectly focussed by means of the static 
 refraction of the eye, the increase of refraction, pro- 
 duced by the action of the ciliary muscle on the lens, 
 becomes, after a time, insufficient for the focussing of 
 near objects. For this reason, a normal-sighted person 
 of fifty must either hold his book at a greater distance, 
 in order that the rays of light proceeding therefrom 
 shall be more nearly parallel, or he must supplement 
 his weakened accommodation with a pair of convex 
 glasses. 
 
 Atropine, when instilled into the conjunctival sac, 
 has the property of temporarily paralysing the ciliary 
 muscle, and so suspending entirely the power of 
 accommodation. An atropised normal eye sees dis- 
 tant objects distinctly, by virtue of its static refraction, 
 but is quite unable to focus the divergent rays pro- 
 ceeding from a near object. In other words, atropine 
 produces an artificial presbyopia. 
 
 FIXATION. — In the centre of the retina is the macula 
 Intra, whieh, in the human eye, is far more sensitive 
 to ordinary visual impressions than any other part. 
 It is desirable, therefore, that the eye be brought into 
 such a position that the image of any object which 
 
 especially engages our attention shall be formed upon 
 
 tin- macula lutea. The eye is then said to " fix " the 
 
INTRODUCTION 3 
 
 object. An imaginary line, passing from the centre 
 of the macula, through the optical centre of the eye, to 
 the object looked at, is called the visual axis. 
 
 Convergence. — When the two eyes look at a dis- 
 tant object, the visual axes may, for practical purposes, 
 be considered to be parallel. When, however, a near 
 object is looked at, the two eyes must rotate inwards, 
 in order that both visual axes may be directed to the 
 same object. This active inward rotation of the eyes 
 is called dynamic convergence. In the case of a normal 
 pair of eyes there is no such thing as static convergence, 
 because the primary position of the visual axes is one 
 of parallelism. In a case of convergent squint, how- 
 ever, there is a static convergence corresponding to the 
 angle of the deviation. 
 
 Accommodation and Convergence. — When a 
 person with a normal pair of emmetropic eyes looks 
 at a near object, the eyes converge in order that both 
 visual axes may be directed to the object. At the 
 same time each eye "accommodates," in order that the 
 rays of light from the object may be accurately 
 focussed on its retina. These two functions, ac- 
 commodation and convergence, are, in ordinary 
 life, always used together, so that they have become 
 " associated " by hereditary and individual habit. It 
 is difficult, therefore, for a normal pair of eyes to 
 accommodate without converging or to converge 
 without accommodating. 
 
 Conjugate Movements. — In looking to the right, 
 or left, or up, or down, the two eyes move together 
 through exactly the same angle. 
 
 Movements oe each Eye Separately. — The 
 extreme range of upward and downward rotations of 
 a single eye varies slightly in different people, the 
 average being about 46° up and 56° down. 1 Outward 
 
 1 These figures are the average of measurements which 
 I made on 64 normal-sighted persons with Stephens' 
 tropometer. 
 
4 INTRODUCTION 
 
 rotation (abversion) may be considered full when the 
 edge of the cornea can be made to touch the outer 
 canthus. The power of inward rotation (adversion) 
 varies considerably in different people. Most people 
 can advert each eye separately through an arc of 50 . 
 The power of independent adversion tends to become 
 less as age advances. 
 
 Hypermetropia. — For purposes of discussion, the 
 refracting media of the eye may be diagrammatically 
 represented as a simple convex lens. In the emme- 
 tropic eye, as already explained, the strength of this 
 lens is such that parallel rays of light are brought to a 
 focus exactly at the retina. A hypermetropic eye is 
 shorter, from before backwards, than the emmetropic 
 eye. This abnormal shortness causes the retina to be 
 situated too near this diagrammatic lens. Now, in 
 order that parallel rays may be brought to a focus on 
 this abnormally situated retina, the focal length of the 
 diagrammatic lens must be shortened, or, in other 
 words, the strength of the lens must be increased. 
 This increase in strength may be brought about either 
 by the patient's using his accommodation in distant 
 vision (and still more, of course, in near vision) or by 
 his wearing a convex spectacle lens in front of the eye. 
 A hypermetrope may be able easily to accommodate 
 sufficiently to correct his refractive error in distant 
 vision, but may have difficulty in sustaining the addi- 
 tional effort of accommodation involved in looking at 
 a near object, e.g., in reading. 
 
 Myopia is the converse of hypermetropia. A myopic 
 eye is abnormally long from before backwards, so that 
 the retina is at a greater distance from the centre of 
 our diagrammatic lens than is the case in the em- 
 metropic eye. In order, therefore, that parallel rays 
 from a distant object shall be iocussed on the abnor- 
 mally situated retina, the focal length of the diagram- 
 matic lens must be increased, /.<•., the strength of the 
 lens must be diminished. The only way in which this 
 
INTRODUCTION S 
 
 can be accomplished is by putting a concave spectacle 
 lens in front of the eye. 
 
 If an indistinctly seen distant object be gradually 
 brought nearer a myopic eye, the rays which enter the 
 eye therefrom become more and more divergent, till 
 a point is reached at which the static refraction of the 
 myopic eye is just sufficient to focus these divergent 
 rays. If the object be brought still nearer, the eye 
 accommodates and so still sees distinctly. 
 
 Astigmatism. — In the human eye, the greater part 
 of the refraction takes place at the surface of the cornea, 
 where the rays of light pass from the air into the much 
 denser medium, the corneal substance. The normal 
 human cornea is approximately a segment of a sphere. 
 Sometimes, however, the cornea is curved more in one 
 meridian than in another, so that it is slightly oval — 
 like a slice from the side of a cocoa-nut. This condi- 
 tion is called astigmatism. In the meridian of greater 
 curvature the rays will be refracted more, and brought 
 to a focus sooner, than in the meridian of less curva- 
 ture. Consequently the picture formed on the retina 
 will be blurred and indistinct. In order to equalise 
 the refraction in the different meridians, a cylindrical 
 lens must be used, i.e., a lens which is curved in one 
 direction only. 
 
 Anisometropia is an inequality in the static refrac- 
 tion of the two eyes. 
 
 Angle Gamma. 1 — The visual axis does not exactly 
 correspond with the geometrical antero-posterior axis 
 
 1 The angle gamma which I have described is the angle 
 which is measured clinically and is of practical importance. 
 But, since the visual axis need not necessarily pass through 
 the centre of motion of the eye-ball, mathematicians have 
 taken as one of the boundaries of the angle gamma a line 
 passing through the centre of motion of the eye-ball to the 
 object looked at. This line is of no clinical significance, 
 as its direction cannot be determined except on paper. 
 2 
 
6 INTRODUCTION 
 
 of the eye-ball. The angle between the visual axis and 
 the antero-posterior axis of the eye-ball is called the 
 angle gamma. Usually the visual axis passes through 
 the pupil to the nasal side of its centre. Rarely it 
 passes through the pupil to the temporal side of its 
 centre, in which case the angle gamma is said to be 
 negative. 
 
 In hypermetropic eyes the angle gamma is usually 
 high, so that, when the visual axes are parallel, the 
 antero-posterior axes of the eye-balls are perceptibly 
 divergent. In this way a deceptive appearance of 
 divergent squint may be produced or a slight con- 
 vergent squint may be masked. 
 
 In myopic eyes the angle gamma usually is low or 
 even negative. In the latter case, while the visual axes 
 are parallel, the antero-posterior axes of the eye-balls 
 are convergent, so that convergent squint may be 
 simulated or a slight divergent squint masked. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 BINOCULAR VISION. 
 
 When the eyes are in the primary position 
 (i.e., looking straight ahead into the distance) 
 the fields of vision of the two eyes overlap every- 
 where, except in a sector of about 35 towards 
 the temporal periphery of each field. In other 
 words, everything which a normal-sighted person 
 sees, he sees with both eyes simultaneously, 
 except objects which lie on his extreme right 
 or his extreme left. These are seen only with 
 one eye. 
 
 When a distant object engages our attention, 
 the two eyes are brought into such a position 
 that a picture of the object is formed simul- 
 taneously on the central part of each retina. 
 Similarly, all other distant objects, within the 
 limits of overlapping of the visual fields, are 
 focussed on functionally corresponding parts of 
 each retina. The impressions thus received 
 from the two eyes are blended in the brain, so 
 that we are conscious only of one single picture. 
 This psychical blending of the two sets of visual 
 impressions is called binocular vision. 
 
 The binocular vision of near objects is a more 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 *° s 
 
 : i 
 
 Fig. i. 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 9 
 
 complex act, inasmuch as the brain has to blend 
 images which, for the most part, do not fall upon 
 geometrically corresponding points of the two 
 retinae. 
 
 The diagram represents a pair of eyes looking 
 at an object O in the middle distance. An image 
 of O is formed on the macula ML and MR of 
 each retina. Now, it is obvious that only objects 
 lying in the line MR— O (or in this line produced 
 beyond O) can be focussed on the macula of the 
 right eye. Similarly, only objects lying in the 
 line ML — O can be focussed on the macula of 
 the left eye. O 2 is an object lying in the line 
 MR — O. An image of O 2 will be formed on the 
 macula of the right eye. But the image of O 2 
 formed in the left eye will not be on the corre- 
 sponding point, but at a point X, considerably 
 to the outer side of the macula. 
 
 Take a practical illustration — look steadily at 
 a distant object, and hold a finger about 18 inches 
 in front of the eyes. The finger will be seen 
 double, the left image corresponding to the right 
 eye, and the right image to the left eye (crossed 
 diplopia). Now look at the finger, and the 
 distant object will appear double, the diplopia 
 this time being homonymous. 
 
 This "physiological diplopia" must be con- 
 stantly present, in looking about a room for 
 example, yet we are not ordinarily conscious of 
 seeing double. This customary freedom from 
 
IO BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 diplopia is brought about, not by mental sup- 
 pression of one of the images, but by the mar- 
 vellous elasticity of the fusion faculty. Both 
 sets of impressions reach the brain, and, by their 
 combination, assist in our appreciation of the 
 third dimension. 
 
 A simple experiment will demonstrate the 
 elasticity of fusion. Place in the amblyoscope 
 (chapter viii.) the slides shown in fig. 13, p. 124. 
 The two slits are fused into one, and the control 
 marks are seen, one on each side. Now gradually 
 diverge the tubes. When the extreme limit of 
 divergence of the visual axes has been nearly 
 reached, fusion of the slits is still maintained, but 
 the control marks recede on each side farther 
 and farther from them. When the limit is 
 passed and fusion can no longer be maintained, 
 the slits suddenly spring apart. As each slit is 
 on the same slide with its control mark, the 
 distance cannot really vary ; but, within certain 
 limits, the mind still fuses the images of the slits, 
 even when they no longer fall upon anatomically 
 corresponding points of each retina. This experi- 
 ment would serve as a proof, were any needed, 
 that fusion is a purely psychical process, and not 
 merely the result of stimulation of corresponding 
 sets of nerve endings in each retina. 
 
 But this must not be taken to indicate that 
 accurate adjustment of the relative positions of 
 the two eyes is unnecessary. The law governing 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 the fusion of images which are not precisely 
 similar may be stated as follows : When the 
 images formed in the two eyes differ in shape, 
 size, or position, if the disparity be not too great, 
 the oculo-motor apparatus first places the eyes 
 in the most favourable relative positions ; the 
 fusion sense, by virtue of its elasticity, then fills 
 lip any gap ivhich may remain. 
 
 The following additional experiments were suggested 
 to me by Dr. Verhoeff, of Boston, U.S.A. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Place fig. 2 and fig. 3, in a stereoscope. The 
 horizontal lines of course are blended. But the 
 oblique lines also are blended; the resulting line 
 appearing perpendicular to the horizontal line. This 
 
1 2 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 blending of the oblique lines cannot be accomplished 
 by any rotation of the eyeballs round a fore and aft 
 axis, as, in this case, the horizontal lines would not be 
 blended. 
 
 Again, if figs. 4 and 5 be blended in a stereoscope 
 the combined image resembles fig. 6. The oblique 
 lines outside the circles are blended into a perpendi- 
 cular line, but the part within the circle, which is seen 
 with one eye only, retains its oblique direction. 
 
 In a case in which each eye separately has 
 the power of seeing, but in which binocular vision 
 is absent, one of two conditions must be present, 
 either (a) the mind is separately conscious of 
 the two sets of impressions received from the 
 two eyes — diplopia, e.g., in paralysis of an 
 external ocular muscle ; or (b) the mind takes 
 note only of the impressions received from one 
 eye and ignores those received from the other 
 — suppression, e.g., in an ordinary case of con- 
 vergent squint. 
 
 Grades of Binocular Vision. 
 
 Most people who have binocular vision have 
 the faculty to its full extent. Anyone, however, 
 who has undertaken the orthoptic training- of any 
 considerable number of squinters, will find that 
 those who see binocularly naturally arrange them- 
 selves into three separate and distinct classes, 
 according to the degree in which they possess 
 the faculty. 
 
 These may be called : — 
 
BINOCULAR VISION I 3 
 
 First Grade. — Simultaneous macular perception. 
 
 Second Grade. — True fusion with some ampli- 
 tude. 
 
 Third Grade. — Sense of perspective. 
 
 First Grade. Simultaneous macular percep- 
 tion. — A patient having only this grade of 
 binocular vision sees devices in a stereoscope 
 as two separate pictures, which overlap and form 
 one only when they are put in certain relative 
 positions corresponding to the directions indepen- 
 dently assumed by the visual axes. The " desire " 
 for binocular vision is absent, so that no effort 
 will be made to maintain fusion. 
 
 Second Grade. True fiision with some ampli- 
 tude. — A person having the second grade of 
 binocular vision not only fuses the retinal images 
 in the two eyes, but can make some effort to 
 maintain fusion. When such a person is fusing 
 the pictures in a stereoscope, if the pictures be 
 separated or brought together the eyes will, to 
 a certain extent, follow them in the interest of 
 binocular vision. 
 
 Third Grade. Sense of perspective. — The two 
 eyes see from different points of view. In looking 
 at any solid object, such as a pillar, for instance, 
 the right eye will see more of the right side of 
 the object and the left eye more of the left side. 
 In the slightly dissimilar pictures thus focussed 
 on the retinas the points of difference are not 
 suppressed, as in the case of a person having 
 
14 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 only the second grade, neither is the observer 
 conscious of diplopia. The psychical blending of 
 the two slightly dissimilar sets of visual impres- 
 sions enables him to appreciate the solidity of 
 surrounding objects and assists in his judgment 
 of their relative distances. 
 
 There is a wide gap between grades i and 2. 
 A patient, however, who has grade 2 usually 
 acquires the third grade also. 
 
 Quite as important as the grade of binocular 
 vision is its intensity. A person whose fusion 
 sense is feebly developed may possibly, under 
 favourable conditions, have the highest grade 
 of binocular vision. But the intensity of his 
 tendency to fusion will be slight, so that, under 
 unfavourable conditions, he easily abandons the 
 effort and uses one eye only. One, however, 
 whose fusion sense is well developed will have 
 such an intense tendency to binocular vision that 
 nothing will make him abandon it while both 
 eyes are open. (Except, of course, a muscular 
 paralysis, in which case he will suffer from 
 persistent and intolerable diplopia.) 
 
 Tests for Binocular Vision. 
 
 Four dot test. — A convenient clinical test, 
 which I have used constantly for some years, 
 is an adaptation of Snellen's coloured glasses. 
 For want of a better name, it may be called 
 the " Four dot test." A pure red glass allows 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 only the red rays of light to pass through it. 
 A pure green glass transmits only the green 
 rays. Therefore light which has passed through 
 
 Fig. 7- 
 
 the red glass cannot be seen at all through the 
 green glass, and vice versa. 
 
 A piece of plain ground glass, 1 2 inches by 9 
 inches, is covered on the back with opaque black 
 paper. The black paper has four round holes cut 
 in it, each 3 inches in diameter, as shown in the 
 
I 6 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 diagram. The lower hole is left clear. Behind 
 the upper hole is cemented a piece of red glass. 
 Behind each of the other two is cemented a piece 
 of green glass. The arrangement is mounted in 
 the front of a box which contains an electric or 
 other bright light. 
 
 The patient, standing five or six yards away, 
 wears a trial frame with a red glass before the 
 right eye and a green glass before the left. If 
 now he sees two dots (white and red) he is 
 using the right eye only. If he sees three dots 
 (white and two green) he is using the left eye 
 only. If he sees four dots (white, red, and two 
 green) he uses both eyes, and has at least grade 
 i binocular vision. If he sees five dots (red, 
 two green, and the white seen double) he has 
 diplopia. If the accuracy of the patient's answers 
 be doubted, it may be tested by changing the 
 glasses in the spectacle frame from one eye to 
 the other. 
 
 The amblyoscope (see chapter viii.). — Adjust 
 the instrument for parallelism of the visual axes. 
 Place in the slots the slides shown in fig, 13. 
 If the patient sees the two slits as one, and, at 
 the same time, sees both the dot and the cross, 
 he has grade 1 binocular vision. Now diverge 
 or converge the tubes of the instrument. If this 
 can be done, even to a very slight extent, while 
 the patient still fuses the slits and sees both 
 control marks, he has grade 2 binocular vision. 
 
BINOCULAR VISION I 7 
 
 For children, more interesting objects, such 
 as figs. 1 6 and 17, may be used in the same 
 way. The extent to which the tubes may be 
 separated or brought together without the eyes 
 becoming dissociated, may, for practical pur- 
 poses, be taken as a measure of the degree of 
 development of the fusion faculty. 
 
 Now put in the instrument the slides shown 
 in fig. 18. A patient with grade 2 binocular 
 vision will only fuse the outer circles ; but he 
 will either suppress the image of one of the 
 inner circles, or will see both inner circles " all 
 mixed up." A person, however, with grade 3 
 binocular vision sees the inner circles blended 
 and appearing much nearer the eye, giving the 
 whole device the appearance of a tub or bucket 
 bottom up. If the slides be now changed from 
 one tube to the other, the inner circle will seem 
 farther away, as if he were looking at the inside 
 of the tub. This appearance is so vivid that 
 even young children can tell at once whether 
 they are looking at the outside or the inside of 
 the tub. By changing the slides from one tube 
 to the other two or three times, guessing on 
 the part of the patient is rendered impossible. 
 I know no better test for the " sense of per- 
 spective." 
 
 Herings drop test for the sense of perspective. 
 — I do not now use this test clinically. The 
 experiment is, however, very instructive. 
 
I 8 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 The test apparatus (fig. 8) consists of a shallow 
 box (of about the size and shape of a box for 
 twenty- five large cigars), open at both ends. 
 From one end two arms project. The extremi- 
 ties of these two arms are joined by a fine thread, 
 on the middle of which is a round bead. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 The patient holds the open end of the box 
 close to his eyes, and looks through the box, 
 at the bead. The surgeon now drops small 
 objects of various sizes, such as cowrie shells, 
 sometimes on one side of the thread, some- 
 times on the other. The patient is asked to 
 say whether each shell, as it drops, falls on the 
 near side or the far side of the thread. 
 
BINOCULAR VISION I 9 
 
 If he has the third grade of binocular vision, 
 " the sense of perspective," he will almost always 
 answer correctly. If he has not, his answers 
 will be mere guesses, and he will be nearly as 
 often wrong as right. 
 
 The principle of the test is as follows : — The 
 box cuts off all view of surrounding objects, 
 including the hands of the surgeon. The size 
 of the falling objects varies, so that their appa- 
 rent size gives no information as to their distance. 
 The view of the falling object is too brief to 
 admit of any movement of accommodation or 
 convergence, or any lateral movement of the 
 patient's head. The patient is thus deprived 
 of all auxiliary means of judging distances, and 
 has to depend upon his "sense of perspective" 
 alone. 
 
 This test is not infallible. I once made the dis- 
 covery that a boy, aged n, with a manifest squint 
 of 1 3 , could tell on which side the shell fell, almost 
 every time, when both eyes were open. When, how- 
 ever, I covered the deviating eye his answers were 
 as often wrong as right. He had, in the deviating 
 eye, & vision. There was no " false macula." He 
 had no diplopia spontaneously, but it was easily elicited 
 with a candle and coloured glasses. I have since met 
 with other similar cases. The explanation is probably 
 this : — In trying the test with a normal pair of eyes, 
 the view of the falling shell is so brief that there is no 
 time for the eyes " to fix " the shell, so the images of 
 the object do not fall upon corresponding parts of the 
 two retinae. It is not, therefore, really a test for the 
 sense of perspective in direct vision, but a test for 
 
20 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 the subconscious perception of " physiological dip- 
 lopia " in more or less eccentric parts of the retinae. 
 
 In none of these cases was the suppression of the 
 vision of the deviating eye very profound, so that a 
 moving object would probably be perceived. As 
 strictly corresponding points are not required in this 
 test, it seems not unlikely that the mind may derive 
 some information from the false image', by making 
 allowance for the faulty position of the deviating eye. 
 This is not difficult to believe when we remember 
 that, in a case of squint in which diplopia has been 
 artificially elicited, the angle of the diplopia is often 
 very much smaller than that of the squint ; show- 
 ing that the mind ordinarily makes some allowance 
 for the position of the squinting eye. 
 
 The Normal Development of the Fusion 
 Sense. 
 
 In two large creches I made experiments, 
 extending over nearly a year, with the object 
 of gaining some knowledge of this subject. It 
 would be tedious to describe in detail the 
 methods employed. I therefore give a general 
 summary of results. 
 
 From the earliest infancy the pupillary light 
 reflex and the fixation reflex are present, showing 
 that some degree of vision of each eye, and the 
 preponderance of the macula region, are innate. 
 If, in a darkened room, the light of a candle be 
 suddenly thrown from an ophthalmoscope mirror 
 into an eye of an infant only a few hours old, 
 the eye will immediately fix the mirror. This 
 fixation is purely reflex and is only maintained 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 2 1 
 
 for an instant. During the first few days of life 
 the infant cannot fix a steady light, but, by 
 suddenly flashing the light into the eye, this 
 reflex fixation may be repeatedly obtained. 
 
 At the end of two or three weeks most infants 
 will fix the mirror steadily for several seconds 
 at a time with one or other eye, but will not 
 converge both visual axes accurately in looking 
 at a near object. 
 
 At the age of five or six weeks, as a rule, the 
 positions of the reflections of the mirror on the 
 child's corneae are symmetrical, showing that 
 the child is fixing the mirror binocularly. But, 
 now and then, one eye turns a little inwards, or 
 more rarely outwards, while the other fixes the 
 mirror. 
 
 During the first few months of life the move- 
 ments of the eyes are uncertain, not completely 
 controlled by the higher centres of the brain. 
 The eyes move more or less together, but the 
 slightest gastric or other disturbance often causes 
 one or other eye to deviate. But it will be 
 noticed that this want of coordination is confined 
 to movements in the horizontal plane. The 
 conjugation of the two eyes for vertical move- 
 ments is well-developed from the earliest infancy : 
 one does not see one eye turn up or down 
 without the other. 
 
 We can scarcely suppose that any degree of 
 binocular vision can be present at a time when 
 3 
 
22 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 the coordination of the eyes in horizontal move- 
 ments is in this rudimentary condition. 
 
 A little later, at the age of five or six months, 
 if the child's attention be engaged by some new 
 and bright object of absorbing interest, such as 
 a cut glass decanter - stopper revolved before 
 a candle flame, it will often be possible for the 
 person nursing the child to slip a large prism 
 before one of his eyes without his appearing 
 to notice it. A prism displaces the image of an 
 object towards its apex. Therefore, if binocular 
 vision is to be maintained, the eye must also 
 rotate in the direction of the apex of the prism. 
 If a prism of, say, 12° has been successfully 
 slipped before one of the child's eyes, with the 
 apex towards the nose, the eye will, in many 
 cases, make a slight inward rotation, showing 
 that the child has some sort of binocular 
 vision. In some cases, however, while the 
 naked eye continues to be steadily directed 
 towards the object, the eye behind the prism 
 makes no inward rotation. The vision of this 
 eye is probably suppressed. These resemble 
 certain cases of occasional squint, in which 
 binocular vision is present when the eyes are 
 "straight," but suppression of the vision of the 
 deviating eye takes place when the squint is 
 manifest. 
 
 After the end of the first year, a child who 
 allows one to make the experiment with the 
 
BINOCULAR VISION 23 
 
 prism apex inwards will almost always turn 
 in the eye in order to blend the images. 
 
 When the experiment is tried with the prism 
 apex up or down, it is, of course, not possible for 
 the eye to make an independent vertical move- 
 ment in order to blend the images. I tried this 
 vertical prism with some of the more tractable 
 infants, aged twelve to eighteen months, who had 
 readily made the compensating inward movement 
 when tried with the prism apex in. Some of them 
 showed their disapproval of the vertical prism 
 by screwing up the eyes and twisting the head. 
 Others made up-and-down conjugate movements 
 of both eyes, sometimes directing their attention 
 to the upper image and sometimes to the lower. 
 
 To recapitulate — The vision of each eye 
 separately, the preponderance of the macular 
 reo-ion, and the conjugation of the two eyes in 
 vertical movements, the human infant has fairly 
 well developed at birth. The conjugation of 
 the eyes for horizontal movements (intended to 
 subserve the function of binocular vision) is 
 perfected within the first few months of life. 
 Between five and six months one finds the first 
 certain evidence of a " desire for binocular 
 vision," though probably a certain degree of 
 binocular vision is present at a much earlier 
 period. At first, if any obstacle be interposed, 
 it is a question whether an effort shall be made 
 to overcome it, or whether the newly acquired art 
 
24 BINOCULAR VISION 
 
 shall be abandoned and the vision of one eye 
 temporarily suppressed. Towards the end of the 
 first year the eyes will make a considerable effort 
 in the interests of binocular vision. If the 
 obstacle prove insuperable the child suffers from 
 diplopia, being no longer able to suppress the 
 vision of one eye. 
 
 The results of fusion training in the case of 
 squinters would seem to show that the fusion 
 faculty normally reaches its full development 
 before the end of the sixth year. 
 
25 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 In most of the text-books squint is defined 
 somewhat as follows : " Squint consists in a 
 deviation of the visual axis of one of the eyes 
 from the correct position of fixation." The 
 authors have mistaken a single symptom for the 
 whole disease. One might as well describe Pott's 
 disease as "a deviation of the spine from its 
 normal shape." 
 
 Two essential conditions are present in every 
 case of comitant convergent squint. 
 
 (i) An abnormal convergence of the visual 
 axes. 
 
 (2) A defect of the fusion faculty. 
 Other conditions may also be found : — 
 
 (3) The vision of the eye which is not being 
 used for fixation is almost invariably suppressed. 
 
 (4) There is, in rather rare instances, more or 
 less congenital amblyopia. 
 
 (5) There is very often acquired amblyopia in 
 the deviating eye, as the result of neglect or 
 inefficient treatment. 
 
 (6) There is usually a refractive error, com- 
 
26 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 monly hypermetropia and hypermetropic astig- 
 matism. 
 
 J\In a healthy person, with a normal fusion 
 faculty, the " desire for binocular vision " causes 
 the two eyes to be directed steadily to the same 
 object. But when the " desire for binocular 
 vision " is absent there is no special reason for 
 this perfect accord between the movements of the 
 two eyes, so that any slight cause may then upset 
 the equilibrium of the convergence centre, and so 
 cause the visual axes to assume permanently 
 faulty relative directions (see chapter iv.). 
 
 Then, when the patient is looking at a distant 
 object, instead of the visual axes being parallel 
 they are convergent. But, in order to see the 
 object distinctly, the patient must look directly at 
 it with one or other eye. He will naturally 
 choose the eye which has the smaller refractive 
 error. He cannot overcome the abnormal con- 
 vergence, neither can he move one eye without 
 the other. He therefore makes a conjugate 
 lateral movement of both eyes until he has 
 brought the better eye into the required position, 
 the other eye turning still more in towards the 
 nose. So that the better eye becomes " straight," 
 and the worse eye manifests the convergence of 
 both. The eye which is used for vision is called 
 the fixing eye ; the other eye is called the 
 squinting or deviating eye. 
 
 If a patient fixes, say, with the right eye and 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 2J 
 
 turns in the left, he is said to have convergent 
 squint of the left eye. This is a useful conven- 
 tion, but it must be remembered that it does not 
 accurately describe the condition, as, of course, 
 convergent squint really concerns both eyes and 
 certain cerebral functions as well. 
 Sin a case of convergent squint the separate 
 movements of each eye are perfect. When one 
 eye is covered, the other eye can move upwards 
 (superversion), downwards (subversion), inwards 
 (adversion), and nearly always outwards 1 (ab- 
 version) to the normal extent. 
 
 The conjugate movements of the two eyes are 
 perfect. When the fixing eye moves in any 
 direction, the deviating eye also moves through 
 exactly the same angle. When the (previously) 
 fixing eye is screened, and the patient fixes with 
 the (previously) squinting eye, the screened eye 
 manifests a deviation exactly equal to that for- 
 merly exhibited by the other eye.' 2 In other 
 words, the squint is comitant. 
 
 The association between accommodation (dy- 
 
 1 In 1,523 cases of convergent squint, in which I noted 
 the power of abversion of each eye separately, I found 
 it perfect in 81 per cent. The remaining 19 per cent., 
 in which abversion was deficient, were almost all cases 
 of long standing. The defect of abversion was less un- 
 common the longer the duration of the deviation. 
 
 2 In a case of uncorrected anisometropia the patient may 
 accommodate to a different degree, according to the eye he 
 uses. This may make the squint appear to be not strictly 
 comitant. 
 
28 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 namic refraction) and dynamic convergence is 
 perfect. When the fixing eye, after looking at 
 a distant object, suddenly accommodates for a 
 near object, the squinting eye rolls still further 
 inwards, a dynamic convergence being super- 
 added to the abnormal static convergence. This 
 dynamic convergence is proportionate to the 
 extra effort of accommodation involved in looking 
 at the near object. 
 
 In fact, there is no motor defect of any kind 
 in a typical case of convergent squint, but the 
 primary position from which these movements 
 start is a "cross-eyed" position instead of 
 parallelism of the visual axes. 
 
 Convergent squint presents certain clinical 
 varieties. These may be classified as follows : — 
 
 (i) Occasional squint, of which there are two 
 classes : (a) Premonitory occasional. (6) True 
 occasional. 
 
 (2) Constant unilateral squint. 
 
 (3) Alternating squint, of which there are two 
 distinct classes : (a) Accidentally alternating- 
 squint. (6) Essentially alternating squint. 
 
 ( 1 ) Occasional squint. — A patient is said to 
 have an occasional squint if the eyes are only 
 occasionally seen to deviate from their normal 
 relative directions. When no deviation is present, 
 the patient usually has the first grade of binocular 
 vision. When he squints he, in the majority of 
 cases, has no diplopia. The deviation of an occa- 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 2Q. 
 
 sional squint is in some cases only seen for a few 
 seconds in the day, in others the eyes are almost 
 as often "crossed" as not. The deviation in 
 different cases may manifest itself under various 
 conditions, e.g., in near vision, on looking down, 
 under the influence of any strong emotion such 
 as fear or anger, when the patient is tired, &c. 
 Most frequently no immediate exciting cause can 
 be assigned. Occasional squints are sometimes 
 called periodic. I have notes of a few cases 
 which may properly be called periodic squints, 
 in which the deviation has appeared every 
 alternate day as regularly as a tertian ague. 
 
 (a) Premonitory occasional squints are simply 
 the precursors of constant squints. They usually 
 become constant after about two or three months. 
 
 (b) True occasional squints are much less 
 common than the premonitory variety. A true 
 occasional squint may gradually cease to show 
 itself as the fusion sense develops, or perhaps 
 optical correction of any refractive error may 
 relieve the condition, or it may maintain its 
 character unchanged throughout life. Many of 
 these last are not squints at all, in the strict sense 
 of the word, but are examples of esophoria, the 
 pathology and treatment of which are described 
 in chapter xi. 
 
 (2) In a case of constant unilateral squint the 
 deviation is constantly present, though the angle 
 may vary ; and it is always manifested by the 
 
30 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 same eye, when both eyes are uncovered. When 
 the " fixing eye " is screened, it turns in towards 
 the nose, and the "squinting eye," instead, is 
 directed to the object which engages the atten- 
 tion (unless this eye has lost the power of central 
 fixation). When the screen is removed, the fixing 
 eye immediately recovers itself, and the squinting- 
 eye again turns in. 
 
 (3) Alternating squint. — When a squinter fixes 
 with either eye indifferently, without covering the 
 other, the squint is said to alternate. Of all con- 
 stant squints, about 85 per cent, are unilateral 
 and 15 per cent, are alternating. These alterna- 
 ting cases arrange themselves into two distinct 
 classes — (a) Squints which accidentally alternate, 
 because the refraction is about the same in each 
 eye, do not essentially differ from unilateral 
 squints. In fact, if these cases are untreated, 
 usually one eye gradually comes to be used ex- 
 clusively for fixation, and the squint becomes 
 unilateral. 
 
 [p) In a case of essentially alternating squint 
 there is usually little or no refractive error, and 
 the visual acuity of each eye separately is, as 
 a rule, perfect. But these patients have a con- 
 genital total inability to acquire fusion. Alter- 
 nating squinters suffer much less than unilateral 
 squinters from neglect, because each eye is used 
 in turn, so that the vision does not deteriorate. 
 If the wearing of glasses does not cause the 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 3 [ 
 
 abnormal convergence to disappear (it seldom 
 does), an accurately performed operation will 
 remove the deformity. But the total absence 
 of the fusion sense renders a perfect cure of an 
 essentially alternating squint impossible. 
 
 Suppression of the vision of the deviating eye. — 
 In a case of convergent squint, as the two eyes 
 are not directed towards the same object, it might 
 be thought that everything would be seen double. 
 This is not so, however, save in the exceptional 
 instances referred to below. The visual acuity 
 of the deviating eye may be perfect, but the 
 picture formed in this eye is mentally ignored or 
 " suppressed," the attention being directed solely 
 to that formed in the fixing eye. This "sup- 
 pression " is not a voluntary act. The inability 
 to receive impressions from both eyes simul- 
 taneously is due to the defect of the fusion 
 faculty, which was the essential factor in. allow- 
 ing the squint to occur in the first instance. 
 
 This suppression, however, does not always 
 extend over the whole field of vision of the 
 squinting eye. If the deviation is of only slight 
 degree, there is a small part of the temporal side 
 of the field of vision of the squinting eye which 
 lies beyond the limit of the field of the fixing 
 eye. In this small area moving objects are 
 perceived by the squinting eye, but, as a rule, 
 are not accurately located. Thus, in an old case 
 of convergent squint, in which the deviating eye 
 
32 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 has lost the. power of central fixation, the extreme 
 nasal side of the retina of this eye (corresponding 
 to the extreme temporal side of its field of vision) 
 is the only part which is ever exercised. For 
 this reason, if the fixing eye in such a case be 
 covered, and the patient be told to look at a light 
 with the deviating eye, this eye will be seen to 
 roll still further inwards, in order to receive the 
 image of the light on the nasal side of the 
 periphery of the retina. 
 
 Occasionally one meets with a squinter who 
 has diplopia of a faint, unobtrusive kind. Squin- 
 ters never complain of diplopia as a trouble, but 
 one now and then meets with a child who, on 
 being carefully questioned, admits seeing a second 
 image. If the white handle of an ophthalmoscope 
 be held up, such a child will point to the real 
 handle and also to "the sham one," showing that 
 he really has a faint homonymous diplopia, 
 though, in the great majority of cases, he has 
 never mentioned it before. In such a case he 
 evidently has some trace of a fusion faculty, but 
 not sufficiently well developed to prevent the 
 occurrence of a deviation. 
 
 Diplopia artificially produced. — In a case of 
 unilateral or accidentally alternating squint, if 
 the deviating eye be not too blind, diplopia may 
 usually be induced by artificial means. For 
 instance, let the patient's attention be directed 
 to a candle flame. Place in a spectacle frame 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT $$ 
 
 a red glass before one eye and a green glass 
 before the other. The images of the candle 
 flame, formed in the two eyes, being thus dif- 
 ferently coloured, the patient is often enabled to 
 perceive them both simultaneously. 
 
 Nature of diplopia. — The popular idea is that 
 a squinter sees the object which lies in the axis 
 of the deviating eye as well as that which lies in 
 the axis of the "straight" eye, so that he can 
 keep an eye on two places at once. Even in 
 the case of the very few squinters who are able 
 to see double spontaneously, or of those who are 
 enabled to do so by artificial means, this view is 
 not correct. A squinter who suffers from diplopia 
 sees, with his deviating eye, a faint, eccentrically- 
 placed image of the object to which the fixing 
 eye is directed, and suppresses the image of the 
 object which lies in the axis of the deviating 
 leye. In other words, he does not see two different 
 [objects, but sees two images of the same object. 
 
 The direction in space in which this second 
 image is mentally projected is peculiar. 
 
 Now, in a case of paralysis of, say, the right 
 external rectus muscle, if the right eye deviates 
 inwards to the extent of 20 , everything seen 
 with this eye will appear to be exactly 20 more 
 to the right than it really is ; in other words, 
 there is homonymous diplopia of 20 . If an eye 
 turns out to the extent of 20 owing to paralysis, 
 there is crossed diplopia of exactly 20 . The 
 
34 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 mind entirely ignores the faulty position of the 
 eye, and projects everything rigidly as though 
 the eye were straight. In a case of convergent 
 squint, on the other hand, if there is diplopia this 
 does not necessarily correspond in degree with 
 the angle of the deviation of the eye. The 
 eccentrically-formed image is, in any case, very 
 faint. Even the most intelligent patient usually 
 is unable to describe its position exactly, as the 
 angle of the diplopia seems to vary without any 
 corresponding variation in the angle of the squint. 
 In most cases the false image is placed about 
 half-way between the true position of the object 
 and the position which would correspond to the 
 angle of the squint. It would seem as though 
 the mind, being informed by the straight eye of 
 the true position of the object, were continually 
 trying to reconcile this knowledge with the 
 impressions produced by the eccentrically-placed 
 false image. 
 
 The amblyopia of convergent squint. — When a 
 patient first comes under observation after having 
 suffered from unilateral squint for a considerable 
 time, one usually finds that the deviating eye 
 is more or less blind, so blind sometimes that 
 fingers can scarcely be counted close to the face. 
 This amblyopia is sometimes, to a certain extent, 
 congenital. But by far the greater part of it is 
 due to a gradual loss of function in an eye which 
 is never used. It might have been prevented. 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 35 
 
 This is plainly seen by comparing the vision in 
 my cases which came under treatment soon after 
 the first appearance of the squint, with the vision 
 in the cases which I saw for the first time only 
 after years of neglect or inefficient treatment (see 
 pages 76 and Jj). 
 
 The power of central fixation in the deviating 
 eye. — In a case of unilateral convergent squint, 
 if the fixing eye be covered the vision of the 
 (previously) deviating eye temporarily ceases to 
 be suppressed. In a fairly recent case, this eye 
 is then directed so as to receive, upon its macula 
 lutea, the image of the object looked at. But if 
 the case be long neglected, this sensitive central 
 region of the retina suffers much more from 
 disuse than the paracentral zone, while the peri- 
 pheral region suffers very little, if at all. As the 
 blindness progresses in this disused eye, a stage 
 is at length reached when the visual acuity of the 
 central region falls below that of the paracentral 
 zone, and later, even below that of the periphery 
 of the retina. If the fixing eye be now covered, 
 the deviating eye is not directed so as to receive 
 upon its macula the image of the object which 
 engages the attention, because the macula has 
 ceased to be the most sensitive part of the retina. 
 This eye then wanders, without remaining steadily 
 in any definite position (lost fixation). Or it may 
 fix with some part of the paracentral region, or 
 roll still further in towards the nose so as to 
 
36 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 present the extreme nasal periphery of the retina 
 for the purpose {false fixation). 
 
 False macula. —False fixation is, unfortunately, 
 exceedingly common in neglected cases of uni- 
 lateral squint. But the variety known as false 
 macula is rare. In an old case of squint, in which 
 the angle of the deviation has remained exactly 
 the same for several years, and in which the sup- 
 pression of the vision of the deviating eye is not 
 profound, the mind sometimes learns to make full 
 allowance for the faulty position of this eye. So 
 that the eccentric image, formed in the deviating 
 eye, is mentally projected to the same spot as 
 the true macular image, formed in the normally- 
 directed eye, and is blended with it. This false 
 macula is merely a small area which has escaped 
 the loss of function which has overtaken the sur- 
 rounding part of the retina. The visual acuity 
 of a false macula is never greater than the 
 normal visual acuity of the region in which it 
 is situated. I have rarely found it equal to ,.'■, ; 
 never greater. Many of these patients can pass 
 Hering's drop test. If an eye, with false macula 
 in a position of convergence, be put " straight " 
 by operation, crossed diplopia is produced. This 
 usually passes off within a few days, but occa- 
 sionally it persists for many months. 
 
 Monocula diplopia. — In an eye with " false 
 macula," central fixation has nearly always been 
 lost. Occasionally it is preserved. In such a 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT T>7 
 
 case, if the fixing eye be covered, the deviating 
 eye will immediately take up central fixation. 
 The " false macula" is then, as a rule, suppressed. 
 If it is not, the result is monocular diplopia. This 
 condition is exceedingly rare. In my detailed 
 notes of more than two thousand cases of squint 
 of all kinds, I find monocular diplopia only men- 
 tioned four times, although I have been constantly 
 looking out for this anomaly. 
 
 Apparent vertical deviation. — On applying the 
 mirror test in a case of convergent squint, one 
 not infrequently notices a slight upward deviation 
 also : then, on covering the originally fixing eye, 
 and causing the originally deviating eye to fix, 
 one sees that the originally fixing eye also turns 
 up as well as in. If the wearing of glasses causes 
 the convergence to diminish, the vertical devia- 
 tion will also diminish proportionately. In the 
 great majority of cases the vertical deviation 
 increases when the gaze is directed towards the 
 side of the fixing eye and diminishes or disap- 
 pears when the gaze is directed away from the 
 side of the fixing eye. 
 
 In some cases of divergent squint, the diver- 
 gent eye turns a little down also, no matter which 
 eye may be fixing. 
 
 A possible explanation is that in these cases the 
 planes of adversion and abversion of the two eyes, 
 instead of being horizontal, are titled down and out 
 towards each temple. Then, when the fixing eye is 
 
 4 
 
38 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 moved horizontally, the deviating eye, in making a 
 corresponding conjugate movement uncontrolled by 
 the fusion sense, moves in this titled plane. Take, for 
 example, a case of convergent squint 20 , exhibiting 
 this double upward deviation. Really each eye is con- 
 vergent io°, but the eyes have made a conjugate move- 
 ment of io° towards the side of the fixing eye so as to 
 bring this eye " straight " and double the apparent 
 convergence of the deviating eye. The fixing eye has 
 thus travelled out and down in its plane, and the 
 deviating eye has travelled in and up. A further conju- 
 gate movement towards the side of the fixing eye will 
 increase the difference in vertical height. A conjugate 
 movement away from the side of the fixing eye, by 
 bringing the eyes to corresponding points in their 
 respective planes of rotation, will cause the vertical 
 difference to lessen or disappear. 
 
 True vertical deviation. — In some cases of 
 squint there is a true vertical deviation, one eye 
 turning up when it becomes the deviating eye, 
 and the other eye turning down when it, in turn, 
 is made to deviate. 
 
 Spurious squint of infants. — During the first 
 few months of life, before the fusion faculty has 
 made much progress in development, it frequently 
 happens that the eyes converge for a few seconds 
 or a minute at a time, in response to some gastric 
 or other disturbance, Or, as nurses are wont to 
 express it, " Babies squint when they have the 
 wind." This is of no importance. Sometimes, 
 too, a child, whose fusion faculty is developing 
 quite normally in other respects, acquires this 
 faculty rather later than usual, just as a perfectly 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 39 
 
 healthy, intelligent child may be late in learning 
 to talk. One may then see one or other eye 
 turn in, occasionally, for a minute or two at a 
 time, even when the child is old enough to walk. 
 Later, if the fusion faculty developes normally, it 
 will so control the movements of the eyes as to 
 prevent any recurrence of the deviation. 
 
 But if the child "crosses his eyes" for many 
 minutes at a time, or if one eye converges while 
 the other steadily fixes some object, or, more 
 especially, if the deviation is always manifested by 
 the same eye, the case is probably one of true 
 squint and demands investigation without delay. 
 And, under any circumstances, it is safer to 
 investigate any case in which a child is seen to 
 cross his eyes occasionally, rather than wait until 
 what may have been a premonitory occasional 
 squint becomes a constant squint. 
 
 " Growing out of a squint!' — With the advent 
 of puberty, the angle of a convergent squint often 
 tends to become somewhat less without any treat- 
 ment. In rather rare instances the eyes become 
 straight, or nearly so, and the patient is said to 
 have "grown out of the squint." But, in the 
 case of a unilateral squint, the squinting eye has 
 nearly always by this time become very blind 
 from disuse. 
 
 The belief in the spontaneous cure of squint is 
 very wide-spread among the general public. This 
 may be due partly to the fact that the deformity 
 
40 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 of squint does, in a few cases, disappear spontane- 
 ously as just mentioned, and partly to the fact 
 that an occasional squint is seen at one time and 
 not at another, but chiefly, I think, to the fact 
 that the spurious squint of infants ceases to 
 manifest itself when the fusion sense developes. 
 
 But, unfortunately, this superstition is not 
 entirely confined to the laity. I have often had 
 a child brought to me with the squinting eye 
 nearly blind from neglect, and have been told 
 that the family practitioner was consulted about 
 it years ago and that he advised the parents to 
 " wait to see if the child would grow out of the 
 squint." 
 
 General course of an untreated case of constant 
 unilateral convergent squint. — At the first ap- 
 pearance of a deviation, the squinting eye always 
 has the power of central fixation when the fixing 
 eye is covered, and the vision is nearly always 
 good in both eyes. There is rarely some con- 
 genital amblyopia. This congenital amblyopia 
 is far less frequent than is generally supposed, 
 and is never responsible for the extreme blindness 
 so often found in old neglected cases of squint. 
 
 In an untreated case, the vision of the deviating 
 eye, being entirely suppressed, gradually deterio- 
 rates from disuse, until, in many cases, central 
 fixation is lost, and the vision reduced to the 
 counting of fingers close to the face. The 
 younger the child the more readily does this 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 4 I 
 
 amblyopia from disuse occur. So much so that 
 it is commonly believed, even by ophthalmic 
 surgeons, that an eye which begins to squint in 
 early infancy is necessarily very blind, and this 
 blindness is supposed to be congenital. Yet this 
 is not the case. Of the cases which came under 
 my care soon after the first appearance of the 
 deviation I do not find the young squinters 
 especially amblyopic (see chapter v.). 
 
 The deviation, in an untreated case of con- 
 vergent squint, usually increases in degree up 
 to the time of puberty. After this time it often 
 tends to become gradually less, until about forty 
 years of age, when in some cases it is scarcely 
 noticeable. It is not very uncommon to see a 
 middle-aged patient with an inconspicuous squint 
 of perhaps two or three degrees, and a nearly- 
 blind eye. He usually says he squinted when he 
 was a boy, but gradually grew out of it. 
 
 The fusion sense, of course, cannot be developed 
 during the continuance of a deviation, except by 
 artificial means (e.g., exercises with the amblyo- 
 scope). If it be prevented from developing in 
 infancy and early childhood, it will never develop 
 at all to any useful extent. It is true that 
 binocular vision of a sort may, in exceptional 
 cases, be acquired as late as eight or nine years 
 of age, but it is so feeble that it is powerless to 
 maintain the normal relative direction of the eyes 
 in the presence of uncorrected hypermetropia ; 
 
4 2 
 
 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 so that glasses must be worn throughout life to 
 prevent a return of the deviation. 
 
 Age at which the deviation first appears. — I n 
 my note-books I find the onset-age recorded in 
 1,017 cases of unilateral convergent squint, and 
 in 178 alternating cases. 
 
 The number of unilateral cases beginning in 
 each year of life was as follows : — 
 
 Before 1 year 
 
 ... 134 cases 
 
 Between 1 and 2 years ... 
 
 ... 186 „ 
 
 2 „ 3 „ 
 
 ... 247 
 
 » 3 „ 4 » 
 
 ... 189 „ 
 
 „ 4 „ 5 „ 
 
 ... 113 
 
 » 5 „ 6 , 
 
 ■ •■ 73 ,, 
 
 After 6 years 
 
 ... 75 » 
 
 It will be seen that in nearly 75 per cent, of 
 the cases the deviation appeared before the end 
 of the fourth year, and in less than 7 h per cent, 
 its advent was delayed until after the sixth year. 
 
 The alternating cases work out as follows : — 
 
 Before 1 year 
 
 .. 61 cases 
 
 Between 1 and 2 years 
 
 -• 34 „ 
 
 2 „ 3 » 
 
 23 „ 
 
 3 „ 4 » 
 
 •• 29 „ 
 
 4 „ 5 » 
 
 • • n » 
 
 „ 5 ,. 6 » 
 
 •• 6 » 
 
 After 6 years 
 
 ■• 14 „ 
 
 In more than 53 per cent, of these alternating 
 cases the deviation was seen before the end of the 
 second year. This high proportion is due to the 
 fact that the essentially alternating squints appear 
 in early infancy. 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 43 
 
 Refractive error in cases of convergent squint. — 
 In infancy and early childhood hypermetropia is 
 the normal refractive condition, myopia or even 
 emmetropia being then very uncommon. In the 
 absence of the controlling influence of the fusion 
 sense, the state of the refraction is the main factor 
 in determining whether the eyes shall deviate 
 inwards or outwards (see chapter iv.). It is not 
 surprising, therefore, that convergent squinters 
 are nearly always hypermetropic, and very fre- 
 quently suffer from hypermetropic astigmatism 
 also. 
 
 I have notes of 1,636 cases of convergent 
 squint which are available for the present 
 enquiry. 
 
 In twenty-three of these cases, or about \\ 
 per cent., both eyes were myopic. I have not 
 included these in the subjoined tables. 
 
 I have arranged the 1,384 cases of unilateral 
 convergent squint in groups, according to the 
 number of dioptres of hypermetropia in the 
 lowest meridian of the fixing eye. 
 
 I have calculated the average refractive error 
 in the highest and in the lowest meridian of 
 each eye. In about three-fourths of these cases 
 the age at which the squint was first seen was 
 recorded on the case sheets. The table shows 
 the number of cases found in each group, and 
 the average onset-age. 
 
 The 229 cases of alternating convergent squint 
 
44 
 
 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 &, ^ 
 
 
 S o 1 
 
 
 1 8 
 
 1 * 
 
 6 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 « = 
 
 
 
 
 <u .2 
 
 00 -3" M — mKCI -+O0 
 
 
 
 J= *0 
 
 (^ O l^ OO 00 O f) y>0O 00 
 
 
 <u 
 
 cx-^; 
 
 n 'm <<1 't 'm NOO 00 O O 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 tx 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VS 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 '> 
 
 ^ c 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 Q 
 
 £.5 
 
 OO ro "1 -*• ri \D 
 
 u 
 
 S T3 
 
 -3- p> O OX 0> Q>\D *jO 
 
 <u 
 
 
 ° V 
 
 O *■" N <"*"> ^" "IvO N 0>(> 
 
 
 
 J~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 *J c 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 d .2 
 
 vO N **> rr, 
 
 <s 
 
 
 43 -a 
 
 c«-> ij-i m n -t\0 vO — r» JO 
 
 1) 
 
 
 M'C 
 
 m (S CO Tt lovO r^oo 'o O 
 
 > 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 "x 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 lt, _ n -t «i 
 
 
 
 sis 
 o in 
 
 ^i-mo t^o f~- v p y> .** ;^> y> 
 
 
 
 O — r» °<o "^t- vr%\i; tsdo i? 
 
 
 
 J S 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 JO-- - Oni^ 
 
 
 CX ; 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 y S°l 
 
 
 
 < ^o 
 
 £ N « to to to n ro ci ro to 
 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 £ So 
 
 CO rj- "=l-00 O O r^ to — 
 
 
 £ rt 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 ICQQQQQQOO 
 
 
 .3 
 
 * M to Ttf- mo r^oo O* O 
 
 
 j3 
 
 : g s . 8 . = . . 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " oj 
 
 -O 
 
 
 si « 
 
 * 
 
 
 o ^ b/j 
 
 0° cstrssss 
 
 
 0-2-5 
 
 «J5 
 
 
 5« 
 
 +QQQQQQQQQ 
 
 
 5 
 
 m ri r^-t u-ivO r^oo Os 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 ■ — 
 
 ■s* 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 *j O ■""•"ESEE- 
 
 
 
 0.5 - ' 
 
 
 cti 
 
 
 z< 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 45 
 
 are similarly tabulated, except that they are 
 arranged in groups according to the number of 
 dioptres of hypermetropia in the right eye. 
 
 Astigmatism in unt 'lateral convergent squint. 
 —In the 1,384 cases I found the proportion of 
 astigmatic to non-astigmatic eyes to be as 
 follows : — 
 
 Fixing eyes. Deviating eyes. 
 
 No astigmatism ... 561 4 QI 
 
 Astigmatism ... 823 983 
 
 But a very large proportion of people whose 
 eyes are, for all practical purposes, normal, have 
 at least half a dioptre of astigmatism. It would 
 only be misleading to expect the eyes of squinters 
 to conform to a higher standard than those of 
 normal-sighted people. If we disregard astig- 
 matism which does not exceed 0*5 d, we get 
 the following results : — 
 
 Fixing eyes. Deviating eyes. 
 
 Astigmatism not over 0.5 D 836 628 
 
 Astigmatism over 0-5 D ... 547 75 6 
 
 On comparing the degree of refractive error 
 in the two eyes in each of the 1,384 unilateral 
 cases we find : — 
 
 Isometropia 4-7 cases. 
 
 Anisometropia 957 cases. 
 
 Or, disregarding differences which do not 
 exceed 0*5 d — 
 
 Anisometropia not exceeding 05 D 663 cases. 
 
 Anisometropia exceeding o"5 D 721 cases. 
 
4 6 
 
 CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 ■^ 
 &0 
 
 
 $0^ 
 
 « c 
 <u .2 
 * "5 
 
 O i- 
 
 b - ; 
 
 .OO 'OO 
 
 - ro 
 
 \v£> I^CO C> O 
 
 O k- 
 
 O - n n -t lo\0 t^oo O 
 
 N^O O00 - N OO 
 
 3 O iu 
 
 Jii 
 
 ' n fTt i-ri\0 t-^oo O O 
 
 +++++++++ 
 
 £ | .***.. . . 
 
 m n f 1t mvO t^OO Ov 
 
 ■Sfi 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 47 
 
 These alternating cases show a much lower 
 percentage of astigmatic eyes than the unilateral 
 cases : — 
 
 Right eye. Left eye. 
 
 No astigmatism 114 II2 
 
 Astigmatism "5 "7 
 
 If we disregard astigmatism which does not 
 exceed 0*5 d, we find : — 
 
 Right eye. Left eve. 
 
 Astigmatism not over 0-5 D 14° J 4 X 
 
 Astigmatism exceeding 0-5 d ... 89 88 
 
 A comparison of the refraction of the two eyes 
 in each of the 229 alternating cases shows : — 
 
 Isometropia 13 1 cases. 
 
 Anisometropia 98 cases. 
 
 Or, disregarding differences which do not 
 exceed 0*5 d : — 
 
 Anisometropia not exceeding o - 5 D 185 cases. 
 
 Anisometropia exceeding o - 5 D 44 cases. 
 
 The relative frequency of squint was the subject 
 of a careful enquiry which Mr. R. E. Hanson, 
 oculist to the Education Department of the 
 London County Council, has been kind enough 
 to undertake at my request. During the last two 
 years 10,239 school children have been examined 
 in the Marylebone and the Tower Hamlets dis- 
 tricts. 253 of these children exhibited a constant 
 squint. In 231 of the cases the squint was con- 
 vergent, and in 22 cases divergent. The test 
 used was the mirror test described on page 80. 
 
4 8 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 THE .ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 /Many curious suggestions have, in former 
 times, been made as to the cause of squint, such 
 as " an evil disposition," naughtiness, imitating 
 other members of the family who squint, the 
 habit of turning the eye to look at a curl or 
 ribbon on one side of the face, &c. The first 
 definite theory, which was almost universally 
 accepted, attributed convergent squint to a 
 shortening of the internal recti. The natural 
 corollary of this was that the affection might 
 be cured by dividing these muscles or their 
 tendons. The theory and its practical applica- 
 tion seemed so plausible and simple that an age 
 of indiscriminate muscle-cutting ensued. When 
 the disastrous results of this practice were begin- 
 ning to be recognised, Donders published his 
 great work, and his "accommodation theory" of 
 the cause of squint immediately came into vogue. 
 It will be well to examine these two theories 
 n detail. 
 
 uscle theory. — Many writers on convergent 
 squint have attributed the anomaly to an undue 
 
THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 49 
 
 shortness or tightness of the internal recti, to a 
 faulty insertion of the tendons of these muscles, 
 or to a paresis of the external recti. To an 
 observer who sees in a case of convergent squint 
 only its most obvious symptom, viz., the abnormal 
 convergence, it may seem reasonable to attribute 
 this deformity to a defect of the muscles which 
 move the eyes. A little investigation ought to 
 convince anyone of the falsity of this view. 
 
 Of 1,523 cases of convergent squint in which 
 I investigated this point, I found the power of 
 abversion (outward rotation) of each eye tested 
 separately to be quite perfect in 81 per cent. ; 
 in the remaining 19 per cent, the power of 
 abversion was sub-normal, but the defect in most 
 of these 19 per cent, was slight. This alone 
 would seem sufficient to demonstrate that, in 81 
 per cent, of convergent squints at least, there is 
 no undue shortness of the internal recti or paresis 
 of the external recti muscles. In the 19 per cent, 
 the deviation had, in the vast majority of cases, 
 lasted several years, and the average degree of 
 the defect of abversion was directly proportionate 
 to the duration of the deviation. The defect of 
 abversion in nearly all the 19 per cent, of cases 
 would therefore appear to be due to secondary 
 changes in the muscles and fascia;, the result 
 of the long continuance of the deviation, not its 
 cause. One wonders that these secondary changes 
 take place so seldom and to such a slight extent. 
 
50 THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 It is a matter of common observation that a 
 convergent squint very frequently disappears, or 
 the eyes even diverge, during general anaesthesia. 
 
 Occasionally a very high degree of convergence 
 disappears when the accommodation is paralysed 
 by atropine. It always reappears when the effect 
 of the atropine has passed off. 
 
 Of cases of convergent squint which are treated 
 with glasses alone, in about 30 per cent. 1 the eyes 
 eventually become approximately "straight," and 
 remain so as long as the glasses are worn. 
 
 These facts scarcely seem compatible with a 
 muscular origin of squint. 
 
 Bonders theory. — When a person with normal 
 emmetropic eyes looks at an infinitely distant 
 object, such as a star, the visual axes are parallel, 
 and the static refraction of each eye is sufficient 
 to focus the image of the object on its retina. If 
 the person now looks at an object only a foot 
 away from him he must turn the eyes slightly 
 inwards (convergence), in order that both visual 
 
 1 1 have no statistics of my own showing the proportion 
 of " cures " effected by glasses alone, because I do not rely 
 solely upon optical correction and operation. Of ninety- 
 four cases of unilateral convergent squint quoted by 
 Holthouse, the deviation was gradually overcome, and the 
 eyes remained " straight " so long as glasses were worn in 
 twenty-nine cases, or 308 per cent. Lang and Barrett 
 (R.L.O.H. Reports, vol. xii.) had thirty-seven cures by 
 glasses out of 102 cases, or 36-3 per cent. But in this 
 series all cases in which less than five degrees deviation 
 remained were considered cured. 
 
THE ^ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 5 I 
 
 axes may meet at the object. At the same time 
 each eye must be focussed for near vision (accom- 
 modation), in order that the object may be seen 
 distinctly. These two acts, accommodation and 
 convergence, being always performed together, 
 have become " associated " by hereditary habit, 
 so that it is difficult to converge without accom- 
 modating or to accommodate without converging. 
 
 Hypermetropic eyes in a state of rest are out 
 of focus even for distant objects, and still more so 
 for near objects. A hypermetrope, therefore, in 
 order to see distinctly, must accommodate in 
 distant vision to a degree corresponding to the 
 amount of his hypermetropia. In near vision he 
 must accommodate both for the hypermetropia 
 and for the nearness of the object. There is a 
 tendency for a proportionate abnormal conver- 
 gence to be associated with this abnormal effort 
 of accommodation. Donders considered this 
 tendency to be the cause of convergent squint, 
 and he advised optical correction of the hyper- 
 metropia with a view to curing the squint. 
 
 By this chain of observation and reasoning the 
 great physiologist let the first ray of light into 
 this dark corner of ophthalmology, and gave the 
 first indication for a rational treatment of con- 
 vergent squint. But he was mistaken in sup- 
 posing hypermetropia to be the fundamental 
 cause of the malady. 
 
 The vast majority of children are hyper- 
 
52 THE .-ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 metropic. Of these hypermetropes only a small 
 percentage present themselves at the clinics, 
 whereas nearly all the squinters come at some 
 time or other. Yet, even there, one sees at least 
 a dozen hypermetropes who do not squint for 
 one who does. This cannot be explained on the 
 hypothesis that the severe cases of hypermetropia 
 especially tend to cause squint, because statistics 
 show that this is not the case (see tables i. and 
 ii., chapter iii.). 
 
 It is usually stated that moderate degrees of 
 hypermetropia are especially prone to be asso- 
 ciated with squint. This is explained by saying 
 that a child with moderate hypermetropia will 
 accommodate in order to see distinctly. He 
 only manages to make the extra accommodative 
 effort by bringing into play also an associated 
 effort of convergence. So that he sees distinctly 
 with one eye and turns in the other. But, it is 
 said, if the hypermetropia be excessive, he will 
 not be able to accommodate sufficiently, so that 
 he gives up the struggle, and neither sees dis- 
 tinctly nor squints. 
 
 But this ingenious argument is based on false 
 premises. Moderate degrees of hypermetropia 
 are more common than high degrees, not only 
 in those who squint, but also in those who do 
 not squint. I looked through my out-patient 
 letters at the West Ham Hospital for about 
 eighteen months, and tabulated all the cases 
 
THE ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 53 
 
 of hypermetropia, without squint, in which the 
 refractive error was measured by retinoscopy 
 under atropine. I tabulated the cases according 
 to the degree of hypermetropia, and worked out 
 the percentage number of eyes in each grade. 1 
 
 The results, in the cases in which the hyper- 
 metropia was more than 2 d, were found to 
 correspond very closely with my squint statistics 
 treated in the same way. The proportion of 
 cases with less than 2 d was lower among the 
 non-squinters than among the squinters. Also 
 the average degrees of astigmatism were higher 
 among the non-squinters than among the squin- 
 ters. This is evidently due to the fact that most 
 of the non-squinters were patients who sought 
 advice on account of headaches or visual defect. 
 
 It will thus be seen that the degree of the 
 refractive error has very little to do with the 
 question of whether the patient shall or shall not 
 squint in the first instance, though, of course, 
 when the squint is once established, the refractive 
 error becomes a very important factor. 
 
 A high degree of hypermetropia has no in- 
 
 1 In cases in which there was also astigmatism, the 
 mean between the highest and lowest meridian was taken. 
 I have since compared the results of taking the highest 
 meridian only, also the lowest meridian only. The number 
 of cases taken excludes any accidental source of error. A 
 slight defect in this mode of comparison will, of course, 
 suggest itself, but the error is not sufficiently grave to 
 affect the main results. 
 
54 THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 fluence in determining an early onset of squint, 
 as is conclusively shown by the following table. 
 In the unilateral cases I have taken the average 
 of the highest and lowest meridian in the fixing 
 eye, and in the alternating cases I have taken 
 the average of both eyes. 
 
 Less than +2 D average age of onset = 2^47 years. 1 
 
 + 2 D to +4 D „ „ „ = 2-85 „ 
 
 +4 D to +6 D „ „ „ = 2-92 „ 
 
 More than +6 D „ „ „ = - 2*96 „ 
 
 A great many children who suffer from con- 
 vergent squint have no more than the normal 
 degree of hypermetropia, while 1 or 2 per cent, 
 are actually myopic. 
 
 It is evident, then, that, though hypermetropia 
 stands in some close setiological relation to con- 
 vergent squint, it is not the essential cause of the 
 anomaly. 
 
 /Etiology of Convergent Squint. 
 
 For the sake of clearness, I will first state my 
 proposition, and give the proofs afterwards. 
 
 In a case of convergent squint there is, in 
 addition to the most obvious symptom, the de- 
 formity, always a defect of the fusion faculty, and 
 there is nearly always a suppression of the vision 
 
 of the deviating eye. 
 
 j 
 
 1 The average age of onset is low in these squinters, with 
 less than 2 d of hypermetropia, because cases of essen- 
 tially alternating squint are included in this table. 
 
THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 55 
 
 In the human infant, the motor coordinations 
 of the eyes are already partially developed at 
 birth. During the first few months of life these 
 serve (in the absence of any disturbing' influence) 
 to maintain approximately the normal relative 
 directions of the eyes. Soon the fusion faculty 
 begins to develope. I have found distinct evi- 
 dence of binocular vision in the sixth month. 
 Normally the development of the fusion faculty 
 is well-advanced by the twelfth month, and com- 
 plete before the end of the sixth year. When the 
 fusion faculty has begun to develope, the instinctive 
 tendency to blend the images formed in the two 
 eyes — -the "desire for binocular vision," as it is 
 called — will keep the eyes " straight." When the 
 fusion faculty is fairly well developed, neither 
 hypermetropia, nor anisometropia, nor hetero- 
 phoria can cause squint. In fact, then, nothing 
 but an actual muscular paralysis can cause an 
 eye to deviate, in which case the resulting diplopia 
 is intolerable. Sometimes, however, owing to a 
 congenital defect, the fusion faculty developes 
 later than it should, or it developes very imper- 
 fectly, or it may never develope at all. Then, 
 in this case, there is nothing but the motor 
 coordinations to preserve the normal relative 
 directions of the eyes, and anything which dis- 
 turbs the balance of these coordinations will 
 cause a permanent squint. Thus the essential 
 cause of squint is a defect of the fusion faculty. 
 
' In the presence of this fundamental cause, the 
 eyes are in a state of unstable equilibrium, ready 
 to squint either inwards or outwards on slight 
 provocation. This provocation may be supplied 
 by:- 
 
 (i) Hypermetropia. — As already explained, 
 uncorrected hypermetropia causes a tendency to 
 abnormal dynamic convergence of the visual axes. 
 In the vast majority of cases of hypermetropia the 
 fusion sense is perfect, so that this tendency is 
 kept in check and the child does not squint. If, 
 however, the fusion sense is deficient, the eyes are 
 free to yield to this tendency, and a convergent 
 squint is established. In the cases in which 
 hypermetropia is the immediate exciting cause, 
 the abnormal convergence is at first entirely dyna- 
 mic, static convergence being nil. The squint 
 is at first occasional — when the child is looking 
 at nothing in particular, relaxing the accom- 
 modation, the deviation disappears. Optical cor- 
 rection of the refractive error at this period often 
 cures the deviation. But if nothing is done, the 
 excessive exercise of the function of dynamic con- 
 vergence causes an abnormal static convergence 
 to appear. So that the visual axes are convergent 
 even when the eyes are completely at rest. At 
 this period optical correction does not cause an 
 immediate disappearance of the deviation. It 
 may gradually do so, perhaps, after the glasses 
 have been worn for a few weeks or months. 
 
THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 57 
 
 In cases in which the fusion sense is present 
 but feeble, it may be strong enough to resist the 
 strain of uncorrected hypermetropia during in- 
 fancy, but may give way when the child's atten- 
 tion is directed to his first lessons. There is 
 scarcely ever diplopia. Rarely one meets with 
 a child who, when patiently questioned, admits 
 that he sees a second image. This faint diplopia 
 persists, but is never annoying. 
 
 During the first few weeks of life, even in cases 
 of very high hypermetropia, the motor coordina- 
 tions suffice to maintain approximately the normal 
 relative directions of the eyes, until the developing 
 fusion faculty takes control and makes everything 
 safe. Probably the infant does not use his ac- 
 commodation much at this early period. But, in 
 rare instances, hypermetropia may cause a squint 
 before the period at which the child should 
 normally begin to acquire the fusion faculty {e.g., 
 Case A, 503, page 151). In such a case, if the 
 deviation is allowed to persist, the natural de- 
 velopment of the fusion faculty will, of course, 
 be prevented. 
 
 (2) Anisometropia, and the rare congenital 
 amblyopia, predispose to squint by making bin- 
 ocular vision more difficult. One occasionally sees 
 a case of squint in which the fixing eye is approxi- 
 mately emmetropic and the deviating eye has 
 perhaps 10 or 15 d of myopia. 
 
 (3) If the fusion sense be perfect, a want of 
 
58 THE /ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 balance of the motor apparatus of the eyes will 
 cause heterophoria but not squint. But in the 
 absence of the controlling influence of the fusion 
 sense, this motor imbalance is free to cause an 
 actual deviation. This is seen when, in examin- 
 ing a case of heterophoria, fusion is temporarily 
 rendered impossible by means of Maddox rod, 
 coloured glasses, &c. 
 
 (4) Specific fevers, especially whooping cough, 
 are often assigned by the parents as the cause of 
 the squint. One usually hears that the child was 
 seen to squint during convalescence, that the 
 squint was, at first, occasional, and that it became 
 constant after a few weeks. These children 
 usually have a good deal of hypermetropia. The 
 mode of origin of these squints is probably as 
 follows:— The fusion sense is defective (shown 
 by the absence of diplopia), but the motor co- 
 ordination, or some slight degree of fusion sense, 
 has hitherto sufficed to prevent the occurrence of 
 a deviation. During convalescence the child is 
 given picture-books. Owing to the muscular 
 enfeeblement caused by his illness, he is unable 
 to accommodate so well as formerly. The exces- 
 sive effort of accommodation upsets the unstable- 
 equilibrium. At first^the abnormal convergence 
 is dynamic only, and disappears when the child 
 relaxes his accommodation. A pair of spectacles 
 at this period often brings about a cure. Hut if 
 he opportunity be lost a static convergence 
 
THE ^ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 59 
 
 appears, and what was merely a premonitory 
 occasional squint becomes constant. 
 
 As a contrast to these cases, it occasionally happens 
 that a child, whose fusion faculty is perfect, suffers 
 from a paresis of an external ocular muscle after 
 diphtheria. The child complains of persistent and 
 annoying diplopia until the muscle recovers its func- 
 tion. I recently had the opportunity of watching such 
 a case. The patient, a little girl, aged five years, had 
 paresis of the right external rectus muscle after 
 diphtheria. She volunteered the statement that she 
 saw "two nurses" and that "things looked funny." 
 She was uncertain in her movements in running about, 
 and often made a false shot in picking up a ball 
 from the floor. When I gave her a picture book to 
 look at, she covered the affected eye with her hand. 
 When I saw her a few days later, she kept her head 
 constantly turned to the right, evidently to enable her 
 to blend the images. The case completely recovered 
 in about seven weeks. 
 
 (6) Violent mental disturbance, caused by severe 
 fright, " convulsion-fits," &c, may, in the absence 
 of the fusion faculty, upset the equilibrium of the 
 convergence centre. The convergence is static, 
 it appears immediately, and is constant from 
 the first. Refractive error is not an important 
 feature. A large percentage of these cases are 
 alternating. 
 
 Injury during birth. — Now and then one sees 
 a case in which the power of abversion of an 
 eye has been absent since earliest infancy, 
 probably owing to injury to the sixth cranial 
 nerve during birth. In most of these cases the 
 
60 THE .ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 position of the eye prevents the natural develop- 
 ment of the fusion sense. If no precautions are 
 taken the eye may become extremely amblyopic. 
 Hereditary influence is a marked feature in any 
 series of cases of convergent squint. In 1,373 
 cases of squint in which I was able to get probably 
 reliable information, there was a history of squint 
 in parent, grand-parent, brother, or sister of the 
 patient in no less than 711, or 5 1 78 per cent. 
 
 Proof that the Essential Cause of Squint is a 
 Defect of the Fusion Faailty. 
 
 If a pair of object-slides such as fig. 17 be put 
 in the amblyoscope, a person with a normal pair 
 of eyes will be able to blend the two imperfect 
 images into one complete picture. If the angle of 
 the instrument be varied the eyes will converge, 
 or (to a certain extent) diverge also, in order to 
 follow the objects and maintain fusion. 
 
 Now take a young patient with an ordinary 
 unilateral convergent squint, and good vision in 
 each eye. Adjust the amblyoscope to suit the 
 angle of his deviation. He will only see with the 
 fixing eye, the vision of the squinting eye being 
 suppressed. If the suppression be now overcome 
 by the method described in chapter viii., he 
 will see the two imperfect images simultaneously. 
 After a little practice, a position can usually be 
 found in which the two imperfect images overlap, 
 so that the patient sees them blended into one 
 
THE ETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 6 1 
 
 complete picture. But they are blended only in 
 that one position. If the angle of the instrument 
 be again altered, the images at once separate — 
 no effort can be made to maintain fusion. This 
 shows that, though the fusion faculty is not 
 quite absent, it is exceedingly ill-developed. The 
 brilliant results obtained in these cases by train- 
 ing the fusion faculty at an early age, strongly 
 support the view that the defect of this faculty 
 was the fundamental factor in permitting the 
 deviation to occur. 
 
 Consider next a typical case of essentially 
 alternating squint. The visual acuity of each eye 
 is perfect ; there is no important refractive error ; 
 the movements of each eye separately are perfect. 
 Why then does such a pair of eyes squint ? The 
 muscle theory cannot explain it, because there is 
 no motor defect of either eye. Hypermetropia 
 cannot be the cause, because there is little or 
 no refractive error ; moreover, the wearing of 
 correcting glasses usually has no effect upon the 
 deviation. No theory hitherto put forward has 
 satisfactorily explained these cases. But, if the 
 condition of the fusion faculty be examined, the 
 mystery is cleared up at once. Let a patient with 
 an essentially alternating squint look at a pair of 
 object slides such as fig. 16 in the amblyoscope. 
 When the objects are very far apart, he may be 
 able to see both. But when they are made to 
 approach each other, he loses sight of one of them. 
 
62 THE AETIOLOGY OF CONVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 No amount of practice will ever enable an essen- 
 tially alternating squinter to see the two devices 
 simultaneously when they are close together, 
 much less to blend them. There is a congenital 
 total absence of the fusion faculty. 
 
 The great frequency with which squint occurs 
 in more than one member of a family has enabled 
 me to obtain still more direct evidence. When I 
 have had a child under treatment for convergent 
 squint, I have, in very many instances, induced 
 the mother to bring me also for examination a 
 younger brother or sister of the patient, who had 
 not hitherto squinted. I examined the fusion 
 sense of all except the most intractable of these 
 brothers and sisters of squinters with the amblyo- 
 scope. I have been able to follow the subsequent 
 history of 157 of these children. In 106 cases I 
 found the fusion faculty well developed. Not one 
 of these has subsequently squinted. Of thirty- 
 seven cases in which the note was " doubtful," 
 six have since squinted. Of fourteen cases in 
 which my note said " fusion faculty very defi- 
 cient," eight have since developed a constant 
 squint, and another child is said to cross her 
 eyes occasionally, 
 
63 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 AMBLYOPIA, CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED. 
 
 The amblyopia discussed in this chapter is a 
 partial blindness of an eye in which the most 
 careful examination of the fundus and media 
 reveals nothing sufficient to account for the 
 defect. This amblyopia persists after accurate 
 optical correction of any refractive error which 
 may be present. It may be either congenital or 
 acquired. 
 
 It will be well to consider congenital ambly- 
 opia and the acquired form separately, before 
 discussing" the amblyopia so often found in cases 
 of convergent squint. 
 
 Congenital amblyopia, apart from squint, is very 
 seldom met with. One should not accept a case 
 as being one of congenital amblyopia, unless 
 careful questioning of intelligent and observant 
 parents makes it certain that the patient has 
 never squinted as a child. 
 
 In the course of examining the refraction of 
 many thousands of patients who have never 
 squinted, I have only met with twenty-three cases 
 of amblyopia, of ~ or higher, which I have felt 
 justified in regarding as congenital. These cases 
 
64 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 are described in detail in the appendix (p. 219). 
 They have certain peculiarities in common. The 
 fundus and media are normal in appearance. 
 The fields of vision, both for white and colours, 
 are full. There is no scotoma. Central colour 
 perception is normal. The peripheral form vision, 
 up to within 20° of the fixation point, is normal. 1 
 So that the defect would seem to consist in a want 
 of due preponderance of the macular region, 
 and not in a general lowering of the sensibility 
 of the visual apparatus. In no case was the 
 vision of the amblyopic eye less than e G o- But 
 the most remarkable feature of these cases is that 
 the defect is confined to one eye, which almost 
 invariably has a high degree of compound hyper- 
 metropic astigmatism ; while the other eye has 
 normal vision, and either normal refraction or 
 hypermetropia, without any notable degree of 
 astigmatism." In many of the cases the fusion 
 faculty was examined with the amblyoscope. It 
 was found to be well developed. 
 
 1 For the purpose of testing the peripheral form vision, 
 I use three metal screens about two inches square, each 
 showing a white O on a black ground. The letters on the 
 three screens are of different sizes. By a simple mechanical 
 device the O is readily converted into a C. The screens 
 are successively attached to the object-carrier of a peri- 
 meter. The investigation is proceeded with just as in 
 mapping out the fields of vision, the patient being required 
 each time to say whether the letter is O or C. In this way 
 three zones are mapped out on the chart. This method 
 though very valuable for purposes of scientific investigation, 
 is too tedious for ordinary clinical use. 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 65 
 
 There is another small group of cases in which 
 the amblyopia may almost certainly be regarded 
 as congenital. Table iii., p. 76, includes only cases 
 of squint in which my treatment was begun soon 
 after the first appearance of the deviation and 
 was carried out thoroughly, so that there was 
 scarcely a possibility of any acquired amblyopia. 
 It will be seen that the vast majority of these 
 patients have, with optical correction, perfect 
 vision in each eye. In seventeen cases out of 
 the 193 the vision of the squinting eye was f or 
 Y^. In nine cases it was ~ or A- In two cases 
 it was 3 6 g or £ - In no case was the vision lower 
 than <&, and in no case was the power of central 
 
 2 I wish to avoid vague speculation. But the thought 
 obviously occurs to one — Is it possible that, in some of 
 these cases in which I have regarded the amblyopia as 
 congenital, it may really have been acquired through the 
 patient's confining his attention to the sharp image, even 
 though this is fused with the blurred image of the astig- 
 matic eye ? The fact that the amblyopia is always confined 
 to one eye lends colour to the suggestion. The possibility 
 of confining one's attention to the image formed in one 
 eye, and yet, at the same time, exercising binocular vision, 
 is easily demonstrated. Let one imitate the refractive con- 
 dition of one of these patients by wearing a high cylin- 
 drical lens before one of one's own eyes, then read the test 
 types with both eyes open. By confining the attention 
 to the naked eye, one reads f. In reading a book one 
 soon learns to disregard entirely the blurred image seen 
 through the cylinder. At the same time, it is easy to 
 convince oneself that one is exercising binocular vision — 
 prism, base in, produces diplopia ; prism, base out, causes 
 convergence of the visual axes in order to blend images ; 
 four-dot test, &c. 
 
66 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 fixation absent. On referring to my case books, 
 I find that, in the more amblyopic cases, the 
 defective eye nearly always had a high degree of 
 compound hypermetropic astigmatism, while the 
 other eye had perfect vision and nearly always 
 simple hypermetropia without any notable astig- 
 matism. These cases are described in the 
 appendix. 
 
 Amblyopia acquired from disuse (amblyopia 
 ex anopsia). In a case of convergent squint, 
 even though the vision of each eye separately be 
 perfect, the patient will, when both eyes are open, 
 only see with the " straight " eye. The impres- 
 sions received by the deviating eye are mentally 
 " suppressed." In the case of a young child with 
 a constant unilateral squint, the result of this 
 disuse of the deviating eye is that its visual acuity 
 gradually deteriorates. This deterioration from 
 disuse is the more rapid the younger the child, so 
 much so that it is commonly believed that an eye 
 which squints in infancy is necessarily very blind. 
 This is not so, as table iii. clearly shows. A 
 child with good vision in each eye, who developes 
 a constant unilateral squint at the age of six or 
 eight months, will, in the absence of proper treat- 
 ment, become rapidly blind in the squinting eye. 
 This loss of vision in the infant's deviating eye is 
 so rapid that the power of central fixation is often 
 lost within eight or ten weeks. In an eye which 
 begins to squint constantly at the age of, say, 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 6j 
 
 eighteen months, the progress of the blindness is 
 rapid, but much less so than in a younger child. 
 At least five or six months usually elapse before 
 the eye loses the power of central fixation. An 
 eye which begins to deviate constantly at the age 
 of three years seldom quite loses the power of 
 central fixation in less than a year. I have never 
 seen central fixation lost in a case in which the 
 squint had first appeared after six years of age. 
 After six years of age amblyopia ex anopsia 
 seldom takes place to any great extent. Acquired 
 amblyopia is a true loss of vision, not a failure of 
 the function to develope, as is shown by cases 
 quoted below. 
 
 I have notes of several cases in which ignorant 
 or careless parents have accidentally performed 
 upon their children most instructive (but disas- 
 trous) experiments bearing upon this subject. 
 Here are brief notes of a few of the more striking 
 examples. 
 
 CASE A, 77. 1 — On November 14, 1895, I saw, at 
 West Ham, a girl, aged 2 years 7 months. She had 
 constant convergent squint R. E. 22 . The mother 
 
 1 The letters and numbers are the index marks of the 
 notes in my squint case-books. In the case notes I have 
 used certain abbreviations, some of which may require 
 explanation, e.g., " C.S.R.E. 22 " means "constant uni- 
 lateral convergent squint, the angle of deviation being 22° 
 in distant vision and the right being the deviating eye." 
 " V.R.E." means " vision of the right eye." After glasses 
 had been ordered, the angle of deviation and the visual 
 acuity were always measured with the glasses on. 
 
68 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 said that the child had squinted about a month. The 
 squint was nearly alternating. After shading L. E. for 
 a moment, she would fix with R. E., and continue to 
 do so for a minute or two after removing the shade. 
 Two hours after putting a drop of atropine into the 
 L. E. she was seen to squint always with the L. E. and 
 fix with the R. E. 
 
 November 21, 1895. — Retinoscopy under atropine 
 each eye + 375 D sph. I ordered + 3 D sph. for 
 constant wear ; and a drop of liquor atropinae to be 
 put into the L. E. only every morning. Child to be 
 seen again in a month. 
 
 August 22, 1901. — The child is brought to me at the 
 West Ham Hospital. I have not seen her for nearly 
 six years. The mother has no recollection of having 
 used the drops for the L. E. She says the child wore 
 the glasses for about a year, then lost them. No 
 treatment since. Child is now aged 8 years 4 months. 
 She has convergent squint R. E. 17 . The fixation of 
 the R. E. is lost. Vision of the R. E. is reduced to the 
 counting of fingers at 5 feet. 
 
 Case D, 527. October 16, 1900. — Boy, aged 13 
 months, brought to Moorfields. The mother said he 
 had " squinted the last few weeks." Child has con- 
 vergent squint R. E. 30° about, varies slightly. Good 
 central fixation R. E. 
 
 October 23, 1900. — Retinoscopy under atropine shows 
 refractive error R. E. + 4 D sph. + 1 D cyl. ax. vert., 
 L. E. + 4 D sph. Ordered glasses 0*5 D less than the 
 retinoscopy. Ordered guttaj atropine 1 per cent. L. E. 
 only every morning. 
 
 December 4, 1900. — Child uses unatropised R. E. 
 always, both in near and distant vision, and squints 
 with atropised L. E. Ordered, stop the drops and 
 come again in a month. 
 
 January 8, 1901. — Child has now convergent squint. 
 18 with the glasses. The squint alternates. Ordered, 
 wear glasses and come first week in April. 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 69 
 
 January 3, 1902. — Child has not been seen for a year. 
 Soon after last visit mother says he lost his glasses. 
 He has had no treatment since. There is now con- 
 vergent squint R. E. 32 . R. E. has lost the power of 
 central fixation. With L. E. bandaged, child sees the 
 1^ inch ivory ball when it is rolling on the floor, but can- 
 not find it when stationary, unless it is close to his feet. 
 
 Case A, 432. January 11, 1900. — Boy, aged 2 years 
 2 months, was brought to me at West Ham Hospital. 
 He had alternating convergent squint 27 . Squinted 
 more in near vision. Mother said he had squinted less 
 than a month. I ordered ung. atrophias thrice daily, 
 for both eyes, and told the mother to bring him again 
 in a week to have his eyes tested for glasses. 
 
 November j, 1901 (one year and ten months later). 
 — The mother did not use the ointment and come 
 again as directed, as the child's father " did not believe 
 in having the eyes messed about with." Child now 
 has convergent squint L. E. 34 . L. E. has lost the 
 power of central fixation, and the ivory-ball test shows 
 
 Case D, 730. July 13, 1901. — Girl, aged 7 weeks, 
 has convergent squint R. E. io° approximately, angle 
 varies slightly. Good central fixation R. E. 
 
 July 17. — Retinoscopy under atropine, each eye + 
 2*5 D sph. Ordered, ung. atropine for L. E. only, 
 every morning. 
 
 July 51. — Child uses R. E. (unatropised) almost as 
 often as L. E. (atropised). Ordered, continue atropine 
 L. E. only. 
 
 August 28. — Atropine has not been used. R. E. now 
 converges 30 about, fairly constant in degree. R. E. 
 has lost the power of central fixation. Ordered, con- 
 tinuous occlusion L. E. for three days. 
 
 August 31. — No fixation R. E. 
 
 1 did not care to order continuous occlusion of this 
 
JO AMBLYOPIA 
 
 very young infant's better eye for many weeks, for fear 
 of rendering it amblyopic. I therefore ordered the eye 
 to be bandaged half of each day. In six weeks R. E. 
 had regained steady central fixation. 
 
 Case B, 24. February 4, 1896.— I was asked to see 
 a girl aged 2 years 10 months. L. E. had squinted 
 occasionally since she had whooping cough, aged i\ 
 years, but for the last four or five weeks the squint 
 had been constant. Angle of convergence 26 . After 
 instilling atropine into E. E. only for about an hour, 
 she turned in R. E. and used L. E. always, both in 
 near and distant vision. She could easily see a small 
 marble at the other end of the room with L. E. The 
 sight of this L. E. must have been perfect or nearly so. 
 
 A week later, retinoscopy under atropine. — R. E. + 
 4-5 D, L. E. 4- 5*5 D. 
 
 I ordered spectacles for constant wear, R. E. + 4 d 
 sph., L. E. 4- 5 U sph. I also ordered a drop of 
 atropine to be put in R. E. only every morning, and 
 proposed exercises with the amblyoscope in a few 
 weeks. 
 
 The parents, not being favourably impressed by my 
 methods, determined to have " another opinion." 
 The child was taken to an ophthalmic surgeon who 
 said she was too young for glasses. He ordered atro- 
 pine for both eyes twice daily. This was kept up for 
 rather more than a year, after which she was given 
 spectacles. At the age of 7 years the surgeon operated 
 on the left eye (tenotomy). 
 
 December 17, 1901. — The child was brought to me 
 live years and ten months after 1 saw her first. She 
 had convergence of L. E. 14", while wearing her glasses. 
 L. E. was prominent and caruncle sunk. The L. E. 
 had lost the power of central fixation, ami its vision 
 was reduced to the counting of fingers at one foot from 
 the face. 1 have since removed the deformity by 
 advancement of the left external rectus, but the eye 
 oi course remains hopelessly blind. 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 7 I 
 
 Case B, 83. October 27, 1897.— A girl, aged 2 years, 
 was brought to me. The mother said she had squinted 
 occasionally for several months, but she had squinted 
 constantly since a few days before the August bank 
 holiday. She had convergent squint L. E. 21°. Using 
 R. E. she could always see the half-inch ivory ball at 
 the far end of the (22 feet) room. When R. E. was 
 bandaged she could see the 1^ inch ball with the L. E., 
 but she had great difficulty in finding the 1 inch ball 
 unless she was allowed to begin to run after it before 
 it had stopped rolling. 
 
 November 1, 1897. — Retinoscopy under atropine 
 shows error of refraction to be, each eye + 3*5 D sph. 
 + 075 D cyl. ax. vert. Ordered, spectacles 0*5 D 
 less than the retinoscopy ; continuous occlusion of 
 R. E. for seven days ; after that, one drop of liquor 
 atropinae to be put into R. E. only every morning. 
 
 December 7, 1897. — Child uses R. E. (atropised) in 
 distant vision, and L. E. (unatropised) in near vision. 
 Angle 17 with glasses. Ordered, continue. 
 
 February 8, 1898. — Child now uses (unatropised) 
 L. E. always, both in near and distant vision, and 
 squints always with (atropised) R. E. Ordered, stop 
 using the atropine and come again in a month. 
 
 June 29, 1899 (one year and four months later). — 
 Soon after the last visit the child's father, a bank 
 manager, was transferred to a post in the north of 
 England. The mother said that, as she was not able 
 to bring the child to me, she thought she had better 
 continue the drops. She used the drops, for the R. E. 
 only, every day for about six months. Not since. 
 The child has now constant squint R. E. 11°, with the 
 glasses. Ivory-ball test shows vision of L. E. to be 
 perfect, but vision of R. E. is barely ^%. Central fixa- 
 tion is present in R. E. but unsteady. 
 
 Of course all possible means have since been used 
 to restore the sight of the R. E. The child has now 
 learnt to read. On November 8, 1901, the vision of 
 
7 2 
 
 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 the L. E. (which at first squinted) was |, and the 
 vision of the R. E. (which was at first the fixing eye) 
 was iL. 
 
 Case D, 332. On May 9, 1900, I saw, at Moorfields, 
 a boy, aged 3 years 2 months. He had squinted con- 
 stantly, R. E., since the age of 2 years 8 months. Xo 
 heredity. Abversion perfect. C. S. R. E. 46 . Good 
 central fixation R. E. Easily sees half-inch ivory ball 
 at about 20 feet with R. E. Ordered, atropine both 
 eyes for retinoscopy. 
 
 May 16, 1900. — C. S. R. E., with atropine, 37 . 
 Retinoscopy R. E. + 7 I) sph. + 1-25 D cyl. ax. vert. 
 L. E. + 6*25 D sph, + 1-5 D cyl. ax. vert. Ordered, 
 glasses o - 5 D less than retinoscopy ; also, guttas atro- 
 phias 1 per cent. L. E. only every morning. To return 
 in one month. 
 
 June 5, 1901 (thirteen months later). — Mother used 
 drops for L. E. for a month, but was then ill, so child 
 has since been neglected. The glasses have been worn 
 constantly. C. S. R. E. 36 . R. E. has lost the power 
 of central fixation. Ordered, continuous occlusion 
 L. E. for one month. 
 
 July 3, 1901. — Central fixation, R. E., regained. 
 Ordered guttas atrophias 1 per cent. L. E. only every 
 morning for two months. 
 
 August 28, 1901. — Patient uses L. E. (atropised) in 
 distant vision, and R. E. (unatropised) in near vision. 
 Ordered, continue drops L. E. only, for two months. 
 
 December 4, 1901. — Drops have been used until 
 three weeks ago, not since, as they were all finished. 
 Child now, without atropine, uses the originally squint- 
 ing R. E. always, and squints constantly with the 
 originally fixing L. E. 
 
 April 2, [902. — Last time 1 accidentally omitted to 
 give the mother written directions ; there w.is, there- 
 fore, some misunderstanding. Child now squints con- 
 stantly with L. E. (the originally fixing eye) 24 . L. E 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED J 3 
 
 has central fixation, but very unsteady. Ordered, 
 guttae atrophias 1 per cent. R. E. only, every morning 
 for one month. 
 
 May 7, 1902. — Child will not use (unatropised) L. E. 
 voluntarily even in near vision. Ordered, continuous 
 occlusion R. E. for one month. 
 
 June 4, 1902. — Steady central fixation L. E. 
 Ordered, discontinue pad and use guttae atropinae 
 R. E. only, for two months. 
 
 August 6, 1902. — Child now uses L. E. (unatropised), 
 and squints with R. E. (atropised), always in near 
 vision, and usually in distant vision also. Ordered, 
 stop drops. 
 
 August 30, 1902. — Child now uses either eye in- 
 differently, alternating convergent squint 24 , with 
 glasses. 
 
 Case D, 286. October 9, 1900. — Girl, aged 5 years 
 7 months. She began to squint suddenly at the age 
 of 3 years 9 months, and had squinted constantly 
 ever since. Already under atropine. C. S. L. E., 36 . 
 Retinoscopy, R. E. + 4-5 D sph. + 0*25 D cyl. ax. 
 horiz. ; L. E. same at approximate macula. Fixation 
 lost L. E. Ordered glasses + 4 D sph. each eye. 
 R. E. to be continuously occluded for one month. 
 
 August 9, 1 90 1. — Case has been neglected, except 
 that glasses have been worn. V. R. E. f, V. L. E. -^. 
 No fixation L. E. Ordered, continuous occlusion R. E. 
 for three weeks. 
 
 August 30, 1901. — Treatment carried out. Good 
 central fixation L. E. V. L. E. T %. Ordered, guttaa 
 atropinae R. E. only, for six weeks. 
 
 October 4, 1901.— V. L. E. f. C. S. 16 . Child uses 
 L. E. (unatropised) in near vision and R. E. (atropised) 
 in distant vision. Ordered, continue atropine R. E. 
 only, for two months. 
 
 December 3, 1901. — Vision § each eye. Child uses 
 L. E. and squints with R. E. always, both in near and 
 
74 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 distant vision. Ordered, stop atropine and come in 
 two weeks. 
 
 May 6, 1902. — Child has not been seen for live 
 months. She has squinted constantly with K. E. (the 
 originally fixing eye) during that time. V. R. E. T *^, 
 V. L. E. f. Amblyopia to ^ acquired in R. E. since 
 last December. Ordered, gutt?e atropine L. E. only, 
 for one month. 
 
 June 6, 1902.— Squints now with L. E. (atropised) 
 1 8°. V. § each eye. 
 
 NOTE. — This case is altogether exceptional, on 
 account of the age (nearly seven years) at which 
 amblyopia in the R. E. was acquired. 
 
 Amblyopia ex anopsia, like congenital ambly- 
 opia, concerns almost entirely the central and 
 paracentral region of the retina, and produces no 
 contraction of the peripheral limits of the field 
 of vision. But the blindness often reaches an 
 extreme degree which is never met with in the 
 congenital form. In congenital amblyopia the 
 central vision is never lower than ^, the visual 
 acuity normally found at 5 from the fixation 
 point. In an extreme case of acquired blind- 
 ness, on the other hand, there is often a scotoma 
 extending about 25 to 30 round the centre of 
 the field of vision. In this scotoma there may 
 be bare perception of light. Outside this area 
 fingers may be counted a foot or two from the 
 face. 
 
 Amblyopia in Casks ok Convergent Squint. 
 
 Congenital and acquired amblyopia having been 
 studied separately, one is now in a position to 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 75 
 
 discuss the cause of the blindness so often found 
 in cases of unilateral convergent squint. In any 
 individual case, seen for the first time when the 
 squint has lasted several years, it is impossible 
 to say how much of the blindness may be due to 
 disuse of the deviating- eye, and how much may 
 be congenital. Statistics, however, enable one 
 to draw a very accurate general conclusion. 
 
 Tables iii., iv., and v., show the visual acuity 
 of the deviating eye in cases of constant uni- 
 lateral convergent squint. I used Snellen's types 
 or the ivory-ball test at the first visit, when 
 possible, and on many subsequent occasions. 
 Nearly all these children have since become old 
 enough to allow me to confirm the results of 
 the ivory-ball test by Snellen's types. The 
 visual acuity noted in the tables is the final 
 result, with optical correction, and after all 
 possible means had been used to remove any 
 acquired amblyopia. 
 
 I have included in the tables only cases in 
 which I could be reasonably certain as to the 
 time of onset of the deviation, and in which 
 my directions were subsequently followed to 
 my satisfaction. The cases had either received 
 no treatment before I first saw them, or they 
 had merely been given glasses. Some had 
 been operated upon. 
 
 Any defect of vision found in the cases in 
 table iii. may be considered as congenital. In 
 
76 
 
 AMBLYOPIA 
 
 these recent cases, any amblyopia which might 
 have been acquired would certainly have been 
 removed by the subsequent treatment. 
 
 Table iv. shows the visual acuity of the deviat- 
 ing" eye after all possible means had been used 
 to remove any defect which might be present. 
 The vision was at first, in many cases, very 
 considerably lower than shown in the tables. 
 
 In the cases in table v. the squint had, in 
 most cases, lasted so long that no improvement 
 in vision was possible. 
 
 A comparison of table iii. with table v. shows 
 that congenital amblyopia only occurs in a very 
 small proportion of the cases, and is never re- 
 sponsible for the extreme blindness so often 
 found in neglected cases of unilateral squint. 
 
 Tables Showing the Visual Acuity of the Deviating 
 Eye in 787 Cases of Constant Unilateral Con- 
 vergent Squint. 
 
 Table III. 
 
 Cases which I saw first when the patient had squinted during 
 less than one-eighth of his or her life. 
 
 Vision of the 
 deviating eye. 
 
 Age ol 
 
 lset of the deviation. 
 
 
 Before 
 12 months. 
 
 1 to 3 yrs. 
 
 After 3 yrs. 
 
 Total. 
 
 i 
 
 33 
 
 62 
 
 80 
 
 165 
 
 f and A 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 T 6 g and q^ 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 3 6 8 and B 6 a 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Less than g'V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fixation lost 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 irrecoverably 
 
 
 
 
 
CONGENITAL AND ACQUIRED 
 
 7 
 
 Table IV. 
 
 Cases which I saw first when the patient had squinted during 
 more than one-eighth and less than on?-half of his or her life. 
 
 Vision of the 
 deviating eye. 
 
 f and T % 
 
 ^g and 5 6 ¥ 
 
 B <V and v % 
 
 Less than %% 
 
 Fixation lost 
 
 irrecoverably 
 
 Age of onset of the deviation. 
 
 Before 
 
 . i o •? yrs. 
 
 12 months. 
 
 After 3 yrs. 
 
 Total. 
 
 Table V. 
 
 Cases which I saw first when the patient had squinted dnrin> 
 more than one-half of his or her life. 
 
 
 
 Vision of the 
 deviating eye. 
 
 Age of onset of the deviation. 
 
 
 Before 
 12 months. 
 
 i to 3 yrs. 
 
 After 3 >rs. 
 
 Total. 
 
 'i 
 
 f and ^V 
 
 T e 8 and & 
 
 36 and e 6 o 
 
 Less than e 6 s 
 
 Fixation lost 
 
 irrecoverably 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 8 
 
 55 
 56 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 32 
 
 53 
 103 
 1 10 
 
 11 
 
 19 
 54 
 4i 
 
 2 5 
 
 14 
 28 
 90 
 102 
 179 
 191 
 
 When I have been consulted about a case of squint, I 
 have always warned the parents of the patient that, in the 
 event of a younger member of the family developing a 
 squint, the case ought to receive attention without delay. 
 I have, therefore, been fortunate enough to see an unusually 
 large proportion of my cases soon after the first appearance 
 of the deviation. 
 
 It is remarkable that only eight cases, commencing 
 before twelve months of age, appear in table iv. This is 
 evidently because parents who have been warned, and 
 those who are especially solicitous for the welfare of their 
 children, seek advice immediately. These cases are included 
 in table iii. The other infants are usually left without 
 treatment for several months, so that they appear in table v. 
 
7§ 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE METHOD OF INVESTIGATING A CASE OF 
 SQUINT. 
 
 Every case of squint should be systematically 
 investigated, as it is only by a thorough knowledge 
 of each case that a rational line of treatment can 
 be determined upon. The following is the plan 
 I always use. It may appear rather formidable 
 at first sight, but, with practice, one can carry out 
 the various tests with great rapidity and precision. 
 The time will surely not be grudged when it is 
 remembered that, in cases which are presented 
 early enough, the patient's whole future career 
 may depend upon the skill and care of the surgeon 
 who first sees the case. 
 
 (i) History. 
 
 (2) The character of the squint 
 
 (3) The power of fixation in the deviating eye. 
 
 (4) Movements of each eye separately. Dyna- 
 mic convergence. 
 
 (5) Vision testing. 
 
 (6) The condition of the fusion faculty. 
 
 (7) The angle of the deviation. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 79 
 
 After using atropine for from three to eight 
 days : — 
 
 (8) The refraction. 
 
 (1) History. — Under this head should be 
 noted : (a) Age of onset, when it can be deter- 
 mined. It may often be fixed very precisely by 
 reference to some family event, such as the birth 
 of the next child, (b) Mode of onset. Whether 
 it began as an occasional squint or was constant 
 from the first, (c) Any illness or injury imme- 
 diately preceding the appearance of the deviation 
 e.g., whooping cough, measles, a blow on the 
 head, "fits," severe fright, &c. (d) Evidence 
 of heredity — squint in brother, sister, or parents 
 of the patient. 
 
 (2) The Character of the Squint. — The 
 presence of a deviation and its character, whether 
 convergent or divergent, unilateral or alternat- 
 ing, may often be determined by simple inspec- 
 tion. But appearances are sometimes misleading, 
 e.g., the high angle gamma often found in hyper- 
 metropes may simulate a divergent squint or 
 mask a slight convergent squint. The low, or 
 even negative, angle gamma usually associated 
 with myopia may give an appearance of abnormal 
 convergence or mask a slight divergence. 
 
 The cover test is at best only a rough test having 
 many sources of error. It is, moreover, not possible 
 to use it with young children. Hut, as it is very 
 generally employed, it will be well to describe the 
 
8o INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 proper method of making the test, and the fallacies to 
 be guarded against. 
 
 Tell the patient to look steadily at some distant 
 object. Take a narrow card or folded paper and, with 
 a rapid lateral movement, cover, say, the patient's left 
 eye, taking care not to touch his face. If the right 
 eye makes no movement it was probably 1 not squinting. 
 Now uncover the left eye, and see that the patient 
 looks steadily at the distant object. Screen the 
 patient's right eye in the same way. If the left eye 
 makes no movement it was probably 1 not squinting 
 either. If, however, when one eye is covered, the 
 other has to make an outward movement in order to 
 fix the object, it was previously squinting inwards ; if 
 it rotates inwards it was squinting outwards. 
 
 In a case in which the patient has been shown to 
 have a squint, but in which he can fix with either eye 
 at pleasure without the other eye being screened, and 
 can maintain fixation after a momentary closure of the 
 lids, the squint is alternating. 
 
 In some occasional squints and heterophorias, while 
 both eyes fix truly when uncovered, either eye deviates 
 when screened, but immediately recovers itself on 
 removal of the screen. 
 
 The mirror lest. — This is an entirely satisfac- 
 tory test, and can be used quite well even in the 
 case of the youngest infants. The patient should 
 be in the dark room, with the lamp behind him. 
 The light is reflected from the mirror of an 
 ophthalmoscope, from a distance of about 2 ft., into 
 the patient's eyes. An infant will immediately 
 look at the mirror ; an older patient should be 
 
 1 If the eye has lost the power of central fixation, it may 
 perhaps make no movement, or it may move in a direction 
 which would mislead any but a careful observer. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SOUINT 8 I 
 
 told to do so. A tiny image of the ophthal- 
 moscope mirror is formed on the patient's cornea. 
 Owing- to the angle gamma, this reflection of the 
 mirror is usually slightly to the nasal side of the 
 centre of the pupil. By flashing the light rapidly 
 from one eye to the other, any want of symmetry 
 in the position of the reflections is at once 
 detected. It may easily be seen, too, which is 
 the deviating eye, and, with practice, a very good 
 guess as to the extent of the deviation may be 
 made. 1 
 
 Squint or paralysis. — In the case of a patient 
 who is old enough to speak, the persistent diplopia 
 would prevent one mistaking' a case of paralysis 
 of one or more of the external ocular muscles 
 for a case of comitant squint. 
 
 But, in the case of an infant who has recently 
 suffered from diphtheria, an objective test is 
 required. The patient is on the nurse's knee in 
 the dark room, with the light behind him. The 
 nurse holds his head immovable. The light is 
 thrown into his eyes, from an ophthalmoscope 
 mirror, from a position slightly to one side of 
 him. When he fixes the mirror the approximate 
 
 1 According to Hirschberg, when the reflection on the 
 squinting eye is at the margin of the cornea the angle of 
 the deviation is about 45 , when it is at the margin of an 
 average-sized pupil the angle is about 15 . Allowance 
 should be made for the estimated size of the angle 
 gamma. 
 
82 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 degree of his deviation is noted. The light is 
 next thrown into his eyes from the other side. 
 If, when he again fixes the mirror, the angle of 
 the deviation is greater or less, we have to deal 
 with a paralysis or paresis, and not with a 
 comitant squint. 
 
 In carrying out the test, it is essential that the 
 light be thrown into the eyes in both cases from 
 approximately the same level, as, in many cases 
 of true squint, the eyes converge more on looking 
 down and diverge more on looking up. 
 
 (3) The Power of Central Fixation. — An 
 exceedingly important point, in its bearing on the 
 treatment and prognosis of a case of unilateral 
 squint, is the presence or absence of the power 
 of central fixation in the deviating eye. 
 
 The patient being in the dark room, with the 
 light behind him, throw the light from an ophthal- 
 moscope mirror first into his good eye, while he 
 looks at the mirror. Note the position of the 
 reflection of the mirror on the cornea of this eye. 
 Then cover the good eye, and note whether the 
 previously deviating eye can now fix the mirror 
 so as to bring the corneal reflection into a corre- 
 sponding position. If it does so, there is central 
 fixation. There may be no fixation, in which 
 case the eye wanders. Or there may be false 
 fixation, in which case an eccentric part of the 
 retina is used for the purpose. An eye which at 
 first appears to have lost fixation may some- 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT S3 
 
 times, with a little patience, be induced to fix 
 
 correctly. 
 
 In the clinics one frequently sees some such proce- 
 dure as the following : The surgeon covers the patient's 
 good eye, then asks him to follow the movement of his 
 ringer with the deviating eye. If he is able to do so, 
 it is assumed that he has central fixation in this eye. 
 This is entirely fallacious. If the deviating eye has 
 any sight at all it can usually follow the movements 
 of a large object. If the deviating eye has false 
 fixation in a position of only slight convergence, even 
 the most prolonged examination by this method will 
 certainly lead to error. 
 
 (4) The Movements of each Eye Separately 
 should be tested by covering- one eye and getting 
 the patient to look with the uncovered eye from 
 side to side and up and down. The test is then 
 repeated with the other eye. This may usually 
 be done even in the case of young infants by 
 showing them something in which they are likely 
 to take an interest. If each eye can be separately 
 abverted until the edge of the cornea touches the 
 outer canthus, abversion may be considered full. 
 The power of adversion varies considerably within 
 normal limits, Most people can advert each eye 
 separately until the corneal margin is within less 
 than one-tenth of an inch of the caruncle. 
 
 Dynamic Convergence. — A careful distinction 
 should be made between static and dynamic con- 
 vero-ence, iust as static and dynamic refraction are 
 distinguished from each other. 
 
84 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 When a person looks at a distant object, if he 
 has no squint the static convergence of the eyes 
 is nil. If he has a convergent squint there is a 
 static convergence corresponding to the angle of 
 the squint. If he has a divergent squint, the 
 static convergence is a negative quantity. 
 
 If now he fixes a near object, there is superadded 
 to the static convergence a dynamic convergence. 
 
 A person who in distant vision has no squint, 
 will usually exercise just sufficient dynamic con- 
 vergence in near vision (in association with dynamic 
 refraction, or accommodation) to allow him to fix 
 the object correctly with both eyes. If, however, 
 his dynamic convergence be excessive, the eyes 
 will tend to squint inwards in near vision. A 
 perfect fusion-sense will keep this tendency in 
 check. But if the fusion-sense be defective, this 
 tendency will be free to cause a squint in near 
 vision. In a case of divergent squint, when the 
 fixing eye accommodates for a near object the 
 divergent eye will usually recover itself to a 
 certain extent. In convergent squint, the faulty 
 eye should turn in still more towards the nose 
 in near vision. As will be seen later, the esti- 
 mation of the dynamic convergence is of the 
 utmost importance in deciding the; question of 
 operation for squint. / 
 
 Method of climating the dynamic convergence 
 in a case of squint. -Stand at arm's length 
 from the patient. Shut one eye and hold the 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 85 
 
 point of the finger, or perhaps some more 
 attractive object, in line with the open eye and 
 the patient's fixing eye. Let the patient look at 
 the object while it is gradually brought nearer 
 his fixing eye. The fixing eye will remain 
 immobile, the deviating eye manifesting the con- 
 vergence of both. In this way, the slightest 
 movement of convergence of the deviating eye 
 can at once be seen, and the point at which the 
 deviating eye begins to diverge again can be 
 accurately noted. This simple procedure should 
 never be omitted. 
 
 (5) Vision Testing. — (a) The vision of patients 
 who are old enough to read letters should be 
 tested with Snellen's distant types. This would 
 appear a very simple matter, yet it is surprising- 
 how often, in the clinics, one finds the vision of 
 the better eye recorded as the vision of each eye, 
 even by experienced assistants. The desire to 
 use the accustomed eye is so strong that, when 
 this is shaded, the patient will involuntarily screw 
 his head round to try to see past the shade. 
 
 {b) Ivory-ball test for young- children. — Apart 
 from its scientific interest, it is often of great 
 practical importance to be able to estimate approxi- 
 mately a young child's visual acuity. For this 
 purpose I use five little ivory balls varying in size 
 from half an inch to one and a half inches in 
 diameter. The child is first allowed to handle the 
 balls with both eyes open. Then one eye is covered 
 7 
 
86 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 by a pad, or, if, he wears glasses, by a piece of cotton 
 wool stuffed behind the lens. He is then asked 
 to go and pick up the balls as they are thrown on 
 the floor to a distance of six or seven yards, one 
 by one, beginning with the largest. By spinning 
 the ball in the fingers as it is thrown, it can be 
 made to "break" on touching the floor, so that it 
 does not go quite in the direction in which it 
 appeared to have been thrown. It is easy to tell, 
 by the way in which the child runs for the ball, 
 whether he really sees it before he starts or is only 
 going to look for it. I test the presumably better 
 eye first, so as to give the other eye the benefit of 
 experience. 
 
 Children are always ready to play this ball 
 game. This method of vision-testing only takes 
 a few minutes, and it succeeds with most children 
 who are old enough to walk. I have used it since 
 1896, and, in cases in which I have subsequently 
 been able to test the vision by means of Snellen's 
 types, I have found my conclusions confirmed. 
 
 (6) The Condition of the Fusion Faculty 
 may, as a matter of convenience, be investigated 
 at this point, but it is usually better to defer the 
 examination until the state of the refraction has 
 been ascertained and the effect of the mydriatic 
 has passed off. 
 
 Examination with the amblyoscope I have found 
 by far the most rapid, precise, and reliable method 
 of ascertaining the condition of the fusion sense. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 87 
 
 Of late years I have used it to the exclusion 
 of all other methods. It is fully described in 
 chapter viii. 
 
 I wish again to draw attention to the distinc- 
 tion between the possession of the fusion faculty 
 and the presence of binocular vision. A patient 
 may have a convergent squint of very high 
 degree, with suppression of the vision of the 
 deviating eye, and yet training with the amblyo- 
 scope may have perfectly developed his fusion 
 faculty. In this case, if the patient looks into 
 the amblyoscope while the instrument is adapted 
 to the angle of the squint, he fuses the pictures 
 — his fusion faculty finds its expression in the act 
 of binocular vision. The same thing happens 
 when his eyes are put approximately "straight" 
 by operative or other means. 
 
 Javal, Maddox, and others estimate the " depth of 
 suppression " by the ease or difficulty with which 
 diplopia may be artificially elicited. Diplopia may 
 sometimes be elicited by placing a red glass before 
 the better eye and alternately covering and uncover- 
 ing it while the patient looks at a candle flame. There 
 is a fallacy here which must be guarded against — the 
 patient recognises the fact that he sees a red light 
 with the "good" eye, and that, when this is covered, 
 he sees a white light. He therefore often says he sees 
 two lights, a red and a white, even though he does not 
 see them both simultaneously. If the red glass fails 
 to produce diplopia, success may often be attained by 
 placing a horizontal prism before the deviating eye, so 
 as to throw the image of the flame on a part of the 
 retina nearer the macula. 
 
88 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 Some writers have recommended, as a test, placing 
 a prism vertically before one eye, to throw the false 
 image out of what they call the " band of suppression." 
 Diplopia can almost always be elicited in this way, 
 even in cases of total absence of the fusion sense. 
 The explanation of this is not far to seek. The con- 
 jugation of the two eyes in horizontal movements, 
 being intended to subserve the act of binocular vision, 
 was probably acquired at no very early period in the 
 development of the human race. The conjugation of 
 the eyes in vertical movements, on the other hand, I 
 believe we share to a great extent with most of the 
 mammals. It is not surprising that disturbance of 
 this very ancient function, by vertical displacement 
 of the image in one eye, should produce diplopia. 
 
 But diplopia tests really give very little information 
 as to the condition of the fusion sense. Some cases, 
 in which diplopia is with difficulty elicited by these 
 methods, readily get the highest grade of binocular 
 vision after fusion training with the amblyoscope, and 
 are subsequently completely cured. Others, again, 
 who easily see double, may be incapable of acquiring 
 more than grade i binocular vision. 
 
 7) The Measurement of the Angle of 
 the Deviation. — At the first, and at each sub- 
 sequent visit, the angle of the deviation is 
 accurately measured. When the child has been 
 ordered glasses, the measurement is always made 
 with the glasses on. The case-sheet then shows 
 at a glance the progressive effect of the treat- 
 ment upon the deviation, and helps one to decide 
 whether it is advisable to supplement this treat- 
 ment by operation. 
 
 Four methods of measuring the angle of devia- 
 tion are here described. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 89 
 
 (a) The deviometer} — This instrument can be 
 very rapidly used, no adjustment being required. 
 Measurements obtained by it are very accurate. 
 It can be used quite easily even with the youngest 
 children. 
 
 A wooden stand, about 10 inches high, supports 
 a horizontal wooden arm, 2 inches wide, \ inch 
 thick, and about 2 feet long. This arm is 
 pivoted at the end, so that it may be swung 
 over to either side as required. The arm is 
 painted black in front. On the back is a 
 scale of tangents to degrees at 60 centimetres 
 distance. A flat, hook-shaped piece of brass, 
 having a white spot on it, slides along the arm. 
 In front of the pillar, below the zero of the scale, 
 is a specially made electric lamp, 5 inches high 
 and f inch in diameter. Flexible wires go from 
 the electric lamp to the wall plug. An electric 
 bell-push is used instead of a switch, so that, by 
 pressing the button, the light may be flashed on 
 and off very rapidly. A string 60 centimetres 
 long is attached to the upright pillar of the instru- 
 ment. At the end of the string is a ring. 
 
 Measurements and details of construction of 
 the deviometer will be found in the appendix. 
 The instrument is put on a table. The nurse 
 
 1 I have no wish to claim originality for this instrument. 
 The principle is that of Maddox' scale and Priestley 
 Smith's tape, the former of which I used for years before 
 I devised the deviometer. 
 
go 
 
 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 sits at the table with the child on her knees. She 
 puts the ring on her finger, and holds the child's 
 head steady with her hands, keeping the string 
 taut. The surgeon "sights" the child's eyes 
 through the nick in the top of the stand, and 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 presses the button. The child immediately looks 
 at the light with his fixing eye. The reflection 
 of the lamp forms a vertical line of light on the 
 cornea of this eye, which shows the correct 
 position of fixation. The position of the line of 
 light on the cornea of the squinting eye enables 
 a good guess to be made as to the angle of the 
 deviation. The light is discontinued. The brass 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 9 1 
 
 traveller with the white disc is slid along the arm 
 to the position which corresponds to the guess. 
 The brass traveller being tapped with the finger, 
 the metallic sound causes the child to look at it. 
 If it does not, a lighted match, held in front of 
 the traveller, will always attract his attention. 
 The button is then pressed, and the light flashed 
 on for an instant. If the line of light on the 
 cornea of the squinting eye is in a corresponding 
 position to that which it formerly occupied in the 
 fixing eye, the angle of the squint is read off on 
 the scale on the back of the arm. If not, the 
 traveller is moved a little, and when the child 
 looks at it the light is flashed on again, and so 
 on till the true position is found. 
 
 An older patient can, of course, sit at the table 
 and hold the string himself, and look at the zero 
 of the scale, or the white disc on the traveller, 
 when directed to do so. 
 
 (b) Maddox tangent scale (fig. 20, page 171) is 
 an admirable device for measuring the deviation. 
 The method is very rapid and accurate. It is 
 not, however, easy to use with small children. I 
 always use it at Moorfields, because the apparatus 
 is fixed in the wall out of harm's way, and there 
 is nothing to get out of order, however roughly it 
 may be used. 
 
 The large figures are used for measuring 
 heterophorias with the Maddox rod. With these 
 we are not at present concerned. The small 
 
Q2 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 figures, in the horizontal scale, represent tangents 
 to degrees at a distance of one metre. They are 
 printed on a strip of paper, which is pasted on 
 a board about seven feet long. In the centre 
 of this scale is a candle. Below the candle is 
 attached a light bamboo rod one metre long. 
 
 The patient rests his cheek against the end of 
 the metre rod. The surgeon puts his head below 
 the rod, so that his eye is vertically below the 
 rays of light which pass from the candle to the 
 patient's face. The patient is first told to look 
 at the light. The position of the image of the 
 candle flame on the cornea of the fixing eye is 
 noted. A guess is made as to the angle of the 
 squint. The patient now is told to look at the 
 figure which represents the guess. If this is too 
 much or too little, other figures are named till 
 the reflection of the candle flame on the cornea 
 of the deviating eye occupies a position similar 
 to that which it formerly occupied in the fixing 
 eye. 
 
 (c) Priestley SmitJi s tape method. — The advan- 
 tages of this method are that it takes very little 
 time and the apparatus required is simple. It is 
 moderately accurate. It is, however, not easy to 
 use with young children. 
 
 A string one metre long has a ring at one end. 
 To the ring is attached a graduated tape. The 
 tape has a weight at its other end. The patient 
 holds the free end of the string against his temple. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 93 
 
 The surgeon puts the ring on a finger of one of 
 his hands in which he holds an ophthalmoscope 
 mirror. The tape is allowed to slide between the 
 fingers of the other hand, the weight keeping the 
 tape taut. The patient is first told to fix the 
 mirror, while the light of a lamp is reflected into 
 the fixing eye. The position of the image of the 
 mirror, on the cornea of the fixing eye, is noted. 
 The light from the mirror is now thrown on to 
 the deviating eye, and the patient is directed to 
 look at the surgeon's tape hand. This is moved 
 horizontally, till the position of the image of the 
 mirror, on the cornea of the squinting eye, is 
 similar to that which it formerly occupied on the 
 cornea of the fixing eye. The string keeps the 
 ophthalmoscope hand at one metre from the 
 patient's eye. The observer keeps the tape hand 
 as nearly as possible at the same distance from 
 the patient's eye. The graduated scale on the 
 tape, where it slides through the tape hand, shows 
 approximately the angle of the deviation in degrees. 
 
 If the length of the string be made 60 cm. instead 
 of one metre, an ordinary Continental tape measure 
 may be used for the graduated tape, one centimetre 
 representing approximately one degree. 
 
 (d) The perimeter method. — I describe this 
 because a perimeter is to be found in every eye 
 clinic and ophthalmic surgeon's consulting room. 
 The patient is seated at the perimeter, which is 
 adjusted so as to bring his deviating eye accurately 
 
94 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 in centre of the arc. A candle is placed at the far 
 end of the room, in line with the zero of the peri- 
 meter and the patient's deviating eye. He is told 
 to look steadily at this candle with his fixing eye. 
 A second candle or taper, with the eye of the 
 surgeon looking exactly over the top of the flame, 
 is carried round the arc of the perimeter till the 
 reflection of the flame lies in the centre of the 
 cornea of the deviating eye. The position of the 
 taper on the graduated arc of the perimeter, 
 shows the angle of the squint in degrees. 
 
 This is a wretched method. It is inaccurate, 
 as it takes no account of the angle gamma. It 
 cannot be used in the case of a small deviation, 
 as the surgeon's head then prevents the fixing eye 
 seeing" the distant candle. It cannot be used for 
 young children. The preliminary arrangement 
 takes up so much time that a surgeon who relies 
 upon this method is apt to neglect to measure the 
 squint at all. 
 
 The angle gamma may be measured separately, if 
 the patient's squinting eye has not lost the power of 
 central fixation. Cover the fixing eye. Let the 
 patient steadily C\x the zero of the perimeter with the 
 squinting eye. The taper with the surgeon's eye 
 looking exactly over it, is carried along the arc till the 
 reflection of the flame appears in the centre of the 
 cornea. The position of the taper on the graduated 
 arc shows the size of the angle gamma. This angle 
 gamma should be added to the perimeter measurement 
 of a convergent squint and subtracted from that of a 
 divergent squint. 
 
INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 95 
 
 (8) The Refraction. — This is examined by 
 retinoscopy, after atropine has been used, for both 
 eyes, three times a day, for from three to eight 
 days. For young children I prefer the atropine 
 ointment, i per cent. Atropine drops, if used too 
 freely, occasionally cause unpleasant symptoms, 
 whereas the ointment almost never causes trouble. 
 The nurse or mother should be shown how to 
 insert the ointment within the lower eyelid with a 
 glass rod. One now and then sees a young child 
 in whom atropine produces perfect cycloplegia 
 with only very slight mydriasis. 
 
 Children of two years and upwards may, with a 
 little tact, usually be induced to allow one to put 
 on a trial frame and proceed with retinoscopy in 
 the usual way. 
 
 In the case of a very young child, a different 
 plan must be followed. The nurse sits in the 
 dark room with the child in her arms. The light 
 is placed above and behind the child's head. The 
 light being reflected from the ophthalmoscope 
 mirror into the child's fixing eye, he immediately 
 looks at the mirror. The lenses are handed, one 
 by one, to the nurse, who holds them up before 
 the fixing eye, or the surgeon may hold the lenses 
 himself. There is seldom much difficulty so far. 
 Now, in order to investigate the deviating eye, it 
 is necessary to screen the fixing eye. The child 
 may, perhaps, not tolerate any screen held near 
 his face. In this case, I hold a black cardboard 
 
Q6 INVESTIGATION OF SQUINT 
 
 screen, about halfway between the child's face and 
 my own, in such a way as to cut off the view of 
 the mirror from the child's fixing eye. The light 
 now being thrown into the deviating eye, the 
 child looks at the mirror with this eye. If 
 central fixation in the deviating eye of one of 
 these very young children has already been lost, 
 one can only make an approximate guess as to 
 the refractive error of this eye. A glass may 
 then be ordered provisionally, to be exchanged 
 for an accurate correction when one has succeeded 
 in restoring central fixation. 
 
 In the case of an older patient, one can measure 
 very accurately the refractive error of an eye which 
 has lost fixation. Throw the light into the fixing 
 eye, and note the position of the reflection of the 
 mirror on the cornea, while the patient fixes the 
 mirror. Now direct the patient to look at a small 
 white card, which is held three or four feet away 
 from him by an assistant. Throw the light on to 
 the cornea of the deviating eye, and manoeuvre 
 the card till the reflection of the image on the 
 cornea is in a position corresponding to that 
 which it formerly occupied in the fixing eye. Now 
 proceed with the retinoscopy. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 THE TREATMENT OF CONVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 I propose to describe first the treatment I 
 adopt in cases of constant unilateral squint. 
 Any modification of treatment required in occa- 
 sional or alternating cases will be considered 
 afterwards. 
 
 The objects to be kept constantly in view in 
 the treatment of squint are — (a) To prevent 
 deterioration of the vision of the deviating eye, 
 and to restore, as far as possible, the sight of this 
 eye in cases in which amblyopia from disuse has 
 already been allowed to occur. (6) To endeavour 
 to remove the fundamental cause of the squint, 
 by training the fusion sense at the earliest pos- 
 sible age. (c) To restore the visual axes to their 
 normal relative directions. 
 
 There are five therapeutic measures at our 
 disposal, any or all of which it may be necessary 
 to use in our endeavour to attain these objects, 
 (i) Optical correction of any refractive error 
 which may be present. (2) Occlusion of the 
 fixing eye. (3) Instillation of atropine into the 
 fixing eye only. (4) Training the fusion sense. 
 (5) Operation. 
 
98 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 ( i ) Optical Correction. —As has been demon- 
 strated in chapter iv., the essential factor which 
 allows a deviation to occur is a defect of the 
 fusion faculty. The eyes then, being uncon- 
 trolled by the necessity for fusion, are for a time 
 kept approximately " straight " by their motor 
 coordinations. But they are in a state of unstable 
 equilibrium, and are ready to squint, either in- 
 wards or outwards, in response to influences which 
 would have no effect if the fusion faculty were 
 normal. In a very large proportion of the cases 
 it is the state of the refraction which chiefly 
 determines whether the eyes shall deviate in- 
 wards or outwards. Thus, in the great majority 
 of cases, the eyes of hypermetropic squinters 
 deviate inwards, and the eyes of myopic squinters 
 deviate outwards. It is rational treatment, there- 
 fore, to attempt to overcome the deviation by 
 optical correction of any refractive error which 
 may be present. 
 
 In cases of simple hypermetropia, or hyper- 
 metropic astigmatism, or compound hyperme- 
 tropic astigmatism, my usual practice is to order 
 spectacles fully correcting any astigmatism which 
 may be present, and correcting all but o"5 d of 
 the hypermetropia. The reason for the slight 
 under-correction of the hypermetropia is this : — 
 When the effect of the atropine, used for the 
 retinoscopy, has passed off, some of the hyper- 
 metropia will in any case become "latent," so that 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 99 
 
 fully-correcting glasses, which gave perfect distant 
 vision under atropine, will, when its effect has 
 passed off, make all distant objects appear misty. 
 This blurring of distant objects not only shortens 
 the child's range of vision at a time when the 
 acuity of the physical senses has the most marked 
 effect upon his mental development, but the 
 effort to see distinctly actually appears to affect 
 unfavourably the angle of the deviation. 1 
 
 In a case of mixed astigmatism, the refractive 
 error should be exactly corrected. 
 
 A certain percentage of cases of convergent 
 squint are myopic. Any myopic astigmatism 
 should of course be exactly corrected. But as 
 regards simple myopia, it might naturally be 
 thought that a considerable under-correction 
 would tend to lessen the abnormal convergence 
 by preventing any effort of accommodation even 
 in near vision. I began by acting upon this 
 assumption, but was gradually forced by experi- 
 ence to abandon it. I find that the best results 
 are obtained by exactly correcting any myopia 
 and myopic astigmatism which may be present. 
 Myopes who begin early to wear fully-correcting- 
 
 1 I have taken over a considerable number of hospital 
 squint cases which were formerly under the care of a 
 colleague, who used habitually to over-correct the hyper- 
 metropia to the extent of 1 D. In the majority of these 
 cases the deviation became less within a few weeks of 
 ordering glasses with which the patients could see dis- 
 tinctly. 
 
lOO THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 glasses, use them quite comfortably for all purposes, 
 and appear to have as good a range of accommo- 
 dation as emmetropes. 
 
 In a case of anisometropia, the refractive error 
 of each eye should be corrected according to the 
 preceding rules. This applies even to cases in 
 which one eye is hypermetropic and the other 
 myopic. 
 
 When glasses are ordered, it is a good plan, 
 especially with young children, to continue the 
 atropine, which has been used for the retinoscopy, 
 until the glasses arrive from the optician. It 
 should then be discontinued. Even an infant 
 soon discovers that he sees better with the glasses 
 than without them, and by the time the effect of 
 the atropine has passed off, the wearing of glasses 
 has become as much a habit as the wearing- of 
 clothes. 
 
 The glasses should be worn constantly, except 
 when the child is in bed at night. They should 
 never be removed at any other time, except for 
 toilet purposes. 
 
 In the case of children who are old enough to 
 attend school, some surgeons order one pair of 
 glasses for distant vision and a stronger pair for 
 reading. I have tried this plan and found it most 
 unsatisfactory. In changing from one pair to 
 the other there is often a considerable interval in 
 which no glasses are worn at all. Besides, the 
 exercise of a noi'mal amount of accommodation in 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT IOI 
 
 association with dynamic convergence, in near 
 vision, is a physiological act, and its suspension 
 has not appeared to me to have permanently 
 lessened the angle of the squint. 
 
 The quality and fit of the spectacle-frames are 
 very important. Steel is the best material for 
 children. Steel frames of good quality will 
 remain without rust for a long time, if the child 
 be kept moderately clean. After a time, the 
 growth of the child's face will necessitate larger 
 frames. For infants and young children the 
 lenses should be circular, 1 or oval with their long- 
 axes vertical, in order that there shall be no 
 temptation for the child to look over them. The 
 lenses should be as large as possible, and should 
 be centred for distant vision. They should be as 
 close to the eyes as they can be without touching 
 the lashes. The bridge piece, which arches over 
 the bridge of the nose, should be of tempered 
 steel, broad, flat, and strong, and should be very 
 accurately fitted. A broad thin plate of tortoise- 
 shell, carefully fitted under the arch of the bridge 
 piece, prevents rust and distributes the pressure 
 over a larger area. Spectacles for children of 
 
 1 Circular lenses, however, have this disadvantage — 
 unless the spectacles are carefully made, the lenses are apt 
 to rotate in the frames, so that the axes of cylinders become 
 displaced. This may be prevented by putting a little 
 Canada balsam in the groove of the rim. If it should be 
 necessary, at any time, to replace a cracked lens, the 
 balsam may be melted by a moderate heat. 
 8 
 
102 
 
 THE TREATMENT OE 
 
 3 years and upwards should have flexible curl 
 sides to hook behind the ears. 
 
 Infants and very young children should have 
 their o-lasses tied on. The sides, in this case, 
 should be straight and should have a loop at the 
 end. They should be very short, only reaching 
 to just above the ear. About f inch near the loop 
 
 should be wrapped with wool. The glasses are 
 tied on by tapes, passed through the loops, behind 
 the child's head. These frames are very com- 
 fortable. If the sides were of the usual length 
 the tapes would act at the end of a long lever, 
 causing pressure above the ear, and perhaps 
 ulceration of the tender skin of the infant. 
 When the infant is put down to sleep in the 
 daytime these frames are not removed. These 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 103 
 
 very short sided do not press on the pillow and lift 
 the glasses from the child's face. 
 
 It is usually stated that children under three or 
 four years of age are too young for glasses. No 
 infant is too young to wear glasses should they 
 be required. Many of my squinting patients have 
 begun to wear spectacles such as I have described, 
 long before twelve months of age. 
 
 Of course young children sometimes break their 
 glasses, but I have never known a case in which 
 the eye has been injured thereby. The lens, 
 being held in the frame, does not break into 
 splinters but cracks across, or chips at the edge. 
 
 (2) Occlusion of the Fixing Eye. — In the 
 case of a child who has squinted constantly with 
 one eye for a considerable proportion of his life, 
 and who has either received no treatment at all or 
 who has been merely given a pair of glasses, one 
 usually finds that the deviating eye has become 
 more or less blind. If the ivory-ball test shows 
 the visual acuity of this eye to be not less than f s , 
 the case may be treated at once in the manner 
 described in paragraph 3. Often, however, one 
 finds that the blindness has progressed far beyond 
 this point, so that the power of central fixation 
 may have been lost and the visual acuity reduced 
 to the ability to count fingers close to the face, or, 
 in some cases, even to bare perception of light. 
 
 In a young child, an attempt should always be 
 made to restore, as for as possible, the sight of 
 
04 
 
 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 the deviating eye, by forcing the child to try to 
 use it. For this purpose I order the fixing eye to 
 be continuously occluded for a time. It is not a 
 good plan to order the eye to be occluded for part 
 of each day only; apart from the fact that this is 
 not nearly so rapid and effective as continuous 
 occlusion, the child usually cries every time the 
 shade is applied, so that the treatment is seldom 
 properly carried out. When the better eye is 
 continuously covered, the child soon becomes 
 accustomed to the shade, so that, after a day or 
 two, he usually ceases to object to it. 
 
 There are several methods of occluding an eye. 
 each of which may be useful in certain cases. 
 For infants, a gauze pad secured by a few turns of 
 bandage answers well. In the case of children 
 who are beginning to get about, the gauze pad 
 should be held in place by strips of strapping- 
 plaster. Children who are well cared for may 
 have the pad changed every morning. Hospital 
 patients, however, often leave the pad undis- 
 turbed for three or four weeks without any harm 
 resulting. 
 
 If the child has a reliable nurse in constant 
 attendance it may be sufficient to pack cotton 
 wool behind the spectacle lens. The cotton wool 
 pad must be carefully applied and the child will 
 require constant supervision, or he will push the 
 pad upwards and outwards and peep down the 
 side of his nose. The gauze pad and strapping is 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 1C>5 
 
 the only possible method for hospital patients, 
 whose parents are seldom able to give them much 
 attention. 
 
 I examine the child again at the end of two or 
 three weeks. If the vision of the deviating eye 
 be improved sufficiently, the shade is discontinued 
 and the case treated as described in paragraph 3. 
 If not, the fixing eye is occluded for another 
 month, after which the child is again examined. 
 If occlusion of the fixing eye is going to do much 
 good, one usually finds a very great improvement 
 in the vision of the squinting eye within a fort- 
 night. If this improvement has not taken place 
 at the end of two months it is seldom worth while 
 to continue the shade. 
 
 (3) Instillation of Atropine into the Fixing 
 Eye Only. — Atropine has the property of tem- 
 porarily paralysing the ciliary muscle, and so 
 suspending the power of accommodation of the 
 eye. When, therefore, atropine is instilled into a 
 normal emmetropic eye, or an eye whose refrac- 
 tive error is corrected by glasses, this eye still 
 sees distant objects clearly, but is unable to focus 
 near objects. An unatropised eye whose vision 
 is only one-sixth or even one-tenth of the normal, 
 is able to see objects, at the reading distance, 
 more clearly than a normal eye whose accom- 
 modation is paralysed by atropine. 
 
 In the case of a young patient, the visuai 
 acuity of whose squinting eye has been shown by 
 
106 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 the ivory-ball test to be not much less than g %, I 
 order atropine to be put into the fixing eye only 
 every morning. The child, of course, wears his 
 glasses at the same time. He will be unable to 
 see distinctly his toys and picture-books with the 
 atropised fixing eye. But he quickly discovers 
 that, by making a conjugate lateral movement of 
 both eyes until he has brought the squinting eye 
 to bear on these near objects, he can see them 
 much more clearly. He acquires the habit of 
 always using the (atropised) better eye for dis- 
 tant vision and his (unatropised) worse eye for 
 near vision. In this way the worse eye is most 
 efficiently exercised, and amblyopia ex anopsia 
 prevented. And, in a case in which a consider- 
 able degree of blindness has already been acquired, 
 one finds at each visit, if the child be young 
 enough, a steady improvement in vision. In 
 many cases, after a few weeks or months of this 
 treatment, the vision of this previously amblyopic 
 eye becomes perfect, or nearly so. When the 
 visual acuity of the (unatropised) "deviating 
 eye " approaches the normal the child uses this 
 eye always both in near and distant vision, and 
 turns in the (atropised) "fixing eye" instead. 
 I then stop the atropine for two or three weeks to 
 see what will happen. Usually the child returns 
 to his old habit of squinting with the eye with 
 which he squinted at first, and fixing with the 
 " fixing eye." In this case 1 order atropine every 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT \Oj 
 
 morning for the fixing eye only for the first seven 
 days in each month. It occasionally happens, in 
 the case of a young child, that, on discontinuing 
 the atropine, what was originally the fixing eye 
 continues to exhibit the deviation. The case 
 may be left for three or four weeks, but care 
 must be taken lest this originally fixing eye 
 now become amblyopic (see Case B, 83, and 
 Case D, 332, chapter v.). The balance may 
 easily be kept by, if necessary, atropising the 
 other eye for a few days. 
 
 The use of atropine for the fixing eye only is 
 an exceedingly efficient curative measure. A 
 young child spends at least half his waking hours 
 in looking at near objects. So that when he 
 uses the (atropised) " fixing eye " in distant vision 
 and the (unatropised) "squinting eye" in near 
 vision, this is equivalent to perfect occlusion ot 
 the " fixing eye " for at least half of each day. 
 And when his glasses are taken off for any 
 purpose, if he has much refractive error, he turns 
 in the atropised " fixing eye " and uses the 
 unatropised worse eye, even in distant vision. 
 
 As regards the form in which the atropine is 
 used, I usually order one drop of a 1 per cent, 
 solution of atropine sulphate to be put into the 
 fixing eye only, every morning. It may be 
 inserted with a "dropper" or, better still, with 
 a small camel hair brush or feather. Atropine 
 ointment answers the same purpose. The lower 
 
108 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 lid should be drawn down, and a small piece 
 inserted into the conjunctival sac with a glass 
 rod. Lamellae containing ^oo to T ^ of a grain 
 of atropine sulphate may be used instead, but 
 nurses usually find them rather difficult to insert. 
 
 I always see the child again within a month of 
 beginning this treatment, and after that at intervals 
 of one or two months, according to the nature of 
 the case. In order that there may be no mistake, 
 the mother is given a card on which are written 
 the directions and the date of the next visit. The 
 treatment is continued until the visual acuity of 
 the squinting eye becomes equal to that of the 
 fixing eye, or until no further improvement can be 
 got. Having employed this method for main- 
 years, and in a very large number of cases, I am 
 able to state positively that there is no danger of 
 its causing any permanent impairment of the 
 power of accommodation. 
 
 This treatment will always prevent the deviating 
 eye from # becoming amblyopic. Its efficiency in 
 curing amblyopia which has already been acquired 
 will be greater the younger the child and the 
 more recent the deviation. After about seven 
 years of age usually not much improvement in 
 vision can be obtained, though I have met with 
 many exceptions to this rule. 
 
 Of course, carefully keeping the fixing eye tied 
 up for not less than half of the child's waking- 
 hours would answer as well, if it could be really 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT IO9 
 
 clone. But, whatever the mother and nurse may 
 promise at first, they will, after a few weeks, find 
 the amount of supervision required too great a 
 tax on their time and patience. But even the 
 hard-worked mother of a large family, attending 
 a hospital out-patient clinic, finds it no trouble to 
 put a drop of atropine into the fixing" eye only 
 every morning, for as long as it may be required. 
 
 A disastrous practice, adopted by many surgeons 
 and invariably recommended in books, is that of 
 ordering atropine for both eyes for children who are 
 supposed to be too young for glasses. The object, 
 of course, is to lessen the convergence by para- 
 lysing the accommodation. Atropine, used in this 
 way, never brings about a permanent cure of the 
 squint, though it occasionally causes a temporary 
 suspension of the deviation. But the deviating 
 eye is usually the more ametropic, so that to 
 paralyse its accommodation with atropine is the 
 very way to ensure that this eye shall never under 
 any circumstances be used. The most hopeless 
 cases one sees, of blindness of the squinting eye, 
 are those which have been treated with atropine 
 for both eyes for a few months. 
 
 (4) Training the Fusion Sense. — In a case 
 of unilateral or accidentally alternating squint, 
 if the child is brought early enough, I endeavour 
 to remove the fundamental cause of the squint by 
 training the fusion sense. For this purpose I use 
 an instrument which I have called " amblvo- 
 
1 IO THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 scope." A description of the amblyoscope and 
 of the method of training" the fusion faculty will 
 be found in the next chapter. The favourable 
 time for fusion training is between the ages of 
 three and five years. In children under three 
 years of age this treatment is apt to be rather 
 difficult, though I have succeeded in many cases. 
 After five years of age the fusion training takes 
 longer, and a much less powerful "desire for 
 binocular vision" is obtained. After six years of 
 age it is seldom worth while to attempt fusion 
 training at all. It is true that, occasionally, a 
 patient who has squinted for many years may 
 have a sort of binocular vision when his deviation 
 is corrected by operation at a much later date. 
 But this small degree of fusion sense is not a 
 fresh acquisition. He had it before he squinted, 
 but it was too feeble to prevent the occurrence 
 of a deviation, or even to cause diplopia. 
 
 Normally the iusion faculty begins to develop 
 at a very early age, and, I think, reaches its full 
 development by about the end of the sixth year. 
 The education of the fusion faculty, at a time 
 when this should normally be developing, is very 
 rapid, easy, and charming in its results. " Stereo- 
 scopic exercises," undertaken at a time when the 
 child is old enough to take an intelligent interest 
 in the process, are infinitely tedious and dis- 
 appointing. 
 
 Of course, one should never omit fusion train- 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT I I 1 
 
 ing in any suitable case which presents itself in 
 private practice. But in a large hospital clinic, it 
 is physically impossible to find time for it except 
 in a few selected cases. 
 
 (5) Operation. — In cases of convergent squint 
 in which the deviation is not overcome by other 
 means, operation becomes necessary. Two op- 
 erative procedures are employed either separately 
 or in combination. They are tenotomy of the 
 internal rectus muscle and advancement of the 
 external rectus muscle. 
 
 Tenotomy of the internal rectus consists in a 
 division of the tendon of this muscle at its inser- 
 tion into the globe. The eye then rotates out- 
 wards to an uncertain degree. This outward 
 rotation usually tends to increase as time goes on. 
 The eye also falls forward to a slight extent, so 
 that the tenotomised eye is more prominent than 
 its fellow and its palpebral fissure wider. A per- 
 manent weakness of inward rotation (adversion) 
 of this eye is also produced. 
 
 In order to advance a muscle, the tendon is 
 separated from the globe at its insertion. It is 
 usually then shortened by removal of more or less 
 of the tendon and muscle. The cut end of the 
 muscle is then secured to the globe at a point 
 further forward, nearer the cornea than its original 
 insertion. By a properly performed advancement 
 the eye is rotated to exactly the extent required. 
 The results obtained by the advancement opera- 
 
112 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 tion described in chapter xii. are permanent, 
 tending- neither to increase nor to decrease with 
 time. Both the power and extent of the rotation 
 of the eye in the direction of action of the 
 advanced muscle are increased. The rotation of 
 the eye in the opposite direction is not in any 
 case weakened in force, though in extreme cases 
 its extent may be slightly diminished. If the 
 abnormal convergence does not exceed 20 or 25°, 
 its cure by advancement of the external rectus 
 muscle rarely causes any noticeable degree of 
 retraction of the globe. If the deviation be of 
 higher degree than this, I usually combine the ad- 
 vancement of the external rectus with tenotomy of 
 the internal rectus, in order to avoid any retraction. 
 
 The operations on the external ocular muscles 
 are fully described and discussed in chapter xii. 
 
 The question may naturally be asked : "As the 
 deviation in a case of convergent squint is not 
 due to a defect of the muscles, why should one 
 ever seek to remedy this deviation by shortening 
 a muscle ?" The answer is this — In the presence 
 of a defect of the fusion faculty, refractive error 
 may cause a deviation, or the equilibrium of the 
 convergence centre may, in some unknown way, 
 be upset by a fright, blow on the head, whooping- 
 cough, &c. If one is able to train the fusion 
 sense early, the desire for binocular vision is, 
 more often than not, in itself sufficient to over- 
 come the deviation and produce a perfect cure, in 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT I I 3 
 
 spite of any adverse influences. In many cases, 
 optical correction of refractive error causes the 
 deviation to disappear. In other cases, as one 
 cannot act directly upon the nervous centre which 
 reerulates convergence, one has to be content to 
 act upon the peripheral motor organs. Take an 
 illustration — One is driving a pair of horses. 
 Suppose the off-side horse has a habit of boring 
 to the left. If any cause can be found (such as 
 sore shoulder), one may cure the habit by remov- 
 ing this cause. If not, it is a reasonable proceed- 
 ing to overcome his " deviation " to the left by 
 shortening the off-side branch of the right rein. 
 
 The angle of the deviation is measured at 
 each visit. If the measurements show a steady 
 decrease, of course, no operation is indicated 
 under any circumstances. In the case of a young 
 child whose fusion sense I have succeeded in 
 developing by means of the amblyoscope, if the 
 deviation does not decrease at a reasonable rate 
 I have recourse to operation. If the angle of the 
 squint is not higher than 20 or 25 , I advance 
 the rectus externus muscle without tenotomising 
 the internus. If the degree is higher than this, I 
 tenotomise the internus at the same time, not 
 because all the rotation required cannot be pro- 
 duced by advancement alone, but in order to 
 avoid retraction of the globe. This child's eyes 
 having been put approximately straight, his 
 trained fusion sense finds its expression in the act 
 
114 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 of binocular vision, and a perfect and permanent 
 cure results. 
 
 In a case in which I expect to get binocular 
 vision, I never perform tenotomy of the rectus 
 internus except in combination with advancement 
 of the externus. I once used to do so in hospital 
 practice, occasionally, for want of beds. Some 
 of these patients have since suffered from insuf- 
 ficiency of convergence, and pain in the eyes in 
 near vision. In two or three cases, in which 
 tenotomy was followed by divergence, I have had 
 to advance the tenotomised muscles. It very 
 rarely happens that any evil consequences follow 
 tenotomy of the internal rectus when combined 
 with advancement of the external rectus in high 
 degrees of squint. Perhaps this is because only a 
 small part of the total rotation is produced by 
 the tenotomy, the advancement of the opponent 
 muscle immediately tightening up everything and 
 correcting any tendency to proptosis. 
 
 If there is no hope of getting binocular vision, 
 so that cure of the deformity is all that can be 
 accomplished, I prefer not to operate until I am 
 able to do so under cocaine. The eyes are then 
 put exactly "straight" by advancement of the 
 external rectus muscle of the deviating eye, with 
 or without tenotomy of the internal rectus of this 
 eye. One not infrequently sees a patient whose 
 rectus internus has at some previous time been 
 tenotomised, producing proptosis of the eye, but 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT 115 
 
 still leaving some degree of convergent squint. 
 In this case an accurately performed advance- 
 ment of the external rectus will cure the devia- 
 tion, and at the same time draw the eye back 
 into its proper position in the orbit. 
 
 Simple tenotomy is an unsatisfactory opera- 
 tion, even in cases in which binocular vision is 
 out of the question. The tendon is divided, and 
 the result cannot in any individual case be fore- 
 told. Some cases turn out well, others do not. 
 The effect produced by a tenotomy is, on an 
 average, about 13 , though it varies very widely in 
 different cases. The effect, as a rule, increases for 
 the first three or four months after the operation, 
 after which it usually remains about stationary. 
 But in some cases, however skilfully the tenotomy 
 may have been performed, its effect continues to 
 increase for years, until a divergent squint is 
 produced — a more hideous deformity than that 
 which the operation was intended to cure. 
 
 There is one condition in which simple tenotomy 
 is sometimes advisable. One occasionally sees a 
 patient whose eyes in distant vision are normally 
 directed, but who turns in one or other eye to an 
 extreme degree in looking at a near object, even 
 in the absence of uncorrected refractive error. 
 One has no means of diminishing the excessive 
 activity of his nervous centre for dynamic con- 
 vergence, but the case may be treated empirically 
 by tenotomy of an internal rectus. 
 
I I 6 THE TREATMENT OF 
 
 The internal rectus should never be tenot- 
 omised in any case in which dynamic conver- 
 gence is subnormal. 
 
 A patient requires very little care after the 
 operation of tenotomy. This is a great advan- 
 tage in a crowded hospital clinic. But I think 
 tenotomy owes its popularity chiefly to the 
 extreme facility of its execution, almost no special 
 knowledge being required. An accurately per- 
 formed advancement, on the other hand, is one 
 of the most delicate (and satisfactory) operations 
 in surgery. 
 
 Alternating convergent squint. — The treatment 
 of an accidentally alternating squint is similar to 
 that of a unilateral squint, except that there is 
 no acquired amblyopia to be remedied. It must 
 not be forgotten, however, that such a case, if 
 neglected, may become unilateral, and that the 
 deviating eye may then become amblyopic. 
 
 Essentially alternating squints are, fortunately, 
 not very common. The treatment consists in 
 optical correction of any ametropia which may be 
 present, followed, in the majority of cases, by 
 operation. Fusion training is impossible, as there 
 is a total congenital absence of the faculty of 
 acquiring fusion. For this reason, if operation be 
 required, I postpone it until the patient is old 
 enough to permit its performance under a local 
 anaesthetic. 
 
 Occasional convergent squint. — The majority of 
 
CONVERGENT SQUINT I I 7 
 
 occasional squints in young children are of the 
 premonitory variety. Optical correction of any 
 refractive error which may be present usually 
 prevents the recurrence of the deviation, and so 
 allows the natural development of the fusion sense 
 to proceed. 
 
 Quite half the cases which are commonly 
 supposed to be occasional squints, occurring in 
 older children and adults, are really examples of 
 esophoria (see chapter xi.). 
 
 If one whose fusion faculty is perfect suffers 
 from anisometropia of so high a degree as to 
 render the act of binocular vision difficult, he will 
 be likely to manifest an occasional squint. Glasses 
 should be ordered which give the sharpest vision 
 in each eye, even though one eye be hyper- 
 metropic and the other myopic. The patient will 
 soon become accustomed to the inequality in the 
 size of the two images. An occasional squint 
 may be caused by hypermetropia in a patient 
 whose fusion sense is feeble. 
 
 Vertical deviation. — If operation be required 
 in a case of true vertical deviation, this should 
 consist in advancement of the inferior rectus 
 muscle, or complete central tenotomy of the su- 
 perior rectus, of the eye which turns up. The 
 inferior rectus should never be tenotomised. 
 
 Apparent vertical deviation (p. 37) requires no 
 treatment beyond that of the constant squint. 
 
n8 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 THE METHOD OE TRAIN I XG THE FUSION 
 
 SEXSE. 
 
 For more than half a century attempts have, 
 from time to time, been made to teach squinting 
 patients to use both eyes together, by means of 
 exercises with some form of stereoscope. Among 
 the stereoscopes used for this purpose are Wheat- 
 stone's original instrument, Brewster's and Helm- 
 holtz's stereoscopes, Hering'shaploscope, Holme's 
 stereoscope, and, more recently, Javal's " Stereo- 
 scope a cinq mouvements," Priestley Smith's 
 " Heteroscope," Landolt's and Parinaud's stereo- 
 scopes, and very many other more or less similar 
 instruments. Most of these are so arranged that 
 they can be adapted to suit the angle of the 
 patient's squint. But the proportion of cases in 
 which they can be used is very small, owing to 
 the suppression of the vision of the patient's 
 deviating eye. J aval attempted to overcome this 
 suppression by prolonged occlusion of one or 
 other eye, in the hope that, when at last both eyes 
 were uncovered, the patient might have diplopia. 
 All these instruments are intended for the use of 
 patients who are old enough to intelligently follow 
 the directions given them. 
 
FUSION TRAINING 119 
 
 Probably most ophthalmic surgeons have, at 
 some time or other, been in the habit of ordering 
 " stereoscopic exercises " in cases of convergent 
 squint, and have, after careful trial, given them 
 up as useless. The reason of their failure is the 
 very early age at which the fusion sense normally 
 develops. Fusion training, to be of any material 
 benefit, must be undertaken within this normal 
 period of development. 
 
 Fusion training of young squinters under five 
 years of age is in suitable cases, quickly and 
 easily accomplished, and the results obtained are 
 most striking and gratifying. Between five and 
 six the treatment is apt to take longer, and the 
 results to be less perfect. After the age of six 
 or, at the latest, seven years, the results are, from 
 the patient's point of view, not worth the time 
 and trouble which they cost. 
 
 There are two great difficulties in the way of 
 fusion training in the case of young children : — 
 
 (i) Though the visual acuity of the child's 
 deviating eye may perhaps be perfect, the vision 
 of this eye is suppressed, so that he is ordinarily 
 unable to receive impressions from it except when 
 the other eye is closed. 
 
 (2) The child is far too young to understand 
 the purpose of fusion training or to follow the 
 directions of the surgeon. He will, therefore, 
 only permit the exercises so long as he finds 
 them attractive and interesting. 
 
120 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 After many experiments, I devised an in- 
 strument with the help of which I have to 
 a great extent succeeded in overcoming these 
 difficulties. I have called it "amblyoscope" — 
 an instrument by means of which a non-seeing 
 eye is trained to take its share in vision. The 
 amblyoscope has retained its present form since 
 
 1895. 
 
 The Amblyoscope^ — The instrument consists of 
 two halves joined together by a hinge. Each half 
 consists of a very short brass tube joined to a 
 longer tube at an angle of 120 . At the angle of 
 junction of the tubes is an oval mirror, 2 protected 
 on the outside by an oval plate of brass. Each 
 half of the instrument has at its distal end an 
 object-slide carrier, and at its proximal end a 
 convex lens having a focal length of five inches 
 — the distance of the reflected image of the object- 
 slide. In front of each lens is a slot into which 
 a prism, axis vertical, may be inserted if required. 
 The diameter of the tubes is \\ inch. 
 
 1 The amblyoscope is made by Mr. Hawes, optician, 
 79, Leadenhall Street, London, E.C., and by the principal 
 manufacturing opticians in England and abroad. 
 
 2 The mirrors must be extremely thin. If they are merely 
 pieces of ordinary thick mirror glass there will be blurring, 
 owing to reflection from the surface of the glass as well as 
 from that of the mercury. Mirrors silvered on the surface 
 answer well but are easily scratched. I have tried polished 
 speculum metal. This is satisfactory but very expensive. 
 The mirrors must be accurately set perpendicular to the 
 plane of the tubes. 
 
FUSION TRAINING 
 
 121 
 
 A brass arc 1 connects the two parts of the 
 instrument, being clamped on one side by a bind- 
 ing screw set in a long slot and on the other by a 
 binding screw set in a short slot. When the screw 
 in the long slot is loosened, the two parts of the 
 instrument can be brought together to suit a con- 
 
 vergence of the visual axes up to 6o°, or separated 
 to suit a divergence of as much as 30 . When 
 this screw is tightened and the screw in the short 
 slot loosened, an amplitude of movement of about 
 io° only is permitted. 
 
 The convex lenses of course render unnecessary 
 any adjustment of the instrument for the patient's 
 inter-pupillary width. 
 
 1 In the earlier forms of the instrument I had the arc 
 marked in degrees, as I thought that the instrument might 
 also be used for the subjective measurement of hetero- 
 phorias. I found, however, that it was of no use for this 
 purpose. No instrument, in which the objects looked at 
 are near the eyes, is reliable for measuring heterophoria. 
 Though the lenses render accommodation unnecessary, the 
 patient unconsciously accommodates for an object which he 
 knows is near. 
 
122 
 
 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 Illumination of the object-slides. — Each object- 
 slide is illuminated by a separate electric lamp. 
 
 A stout brass rod, about two feet in length, is 
 held in brass sockets at each end. The brass 
 sockets are screwed to a board, which is firmly 
 
 ^Q> © 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 1, 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 it ^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 / 
 
 
 o K 
 
 Jy q 
 
 
 
 Fig. 
 
 secured to the wall of the consulting room in such 
 a position that the brass rod is vertical. A brass 
 collar slides up and down the vertical rod, and is 
 fixed by a thumb-screw at the height required. 
 This collar supports two independent collars, each 
 of which has attached to it a long horizontal arm. 
 Each of these arms is four feet in length, and is 
 
FUSION TRAINING I 23 
 
 free to move in a horizontal plane independently 
 of the other. An electric lamp is suspended under 
 each horizontal arm from a ring which slides along 
 the arm. The illumination of either of the object 
 slides in the amblyoscope may be separately in- 
 creased or diminished by bringing its lamp nearer 
 or pushing it further away. 
 
 Before I had electric light I used two paraffin 
 lamps on a table, varying the distance of each 
 lamp and the height of the flame as required. 
 This simple plan answers just as well but is not 
 quite so convenient. 
 
 The object-slides.— -Fig. 13 shows the familiar 
 vertical slits with their control marks. They are 
 not used for fusion training, one could not induce 
 a young child to study such uninteresting objects. 
 They are shown because they are useful in making 
 experiments with older persons. 
 
 The devices used in fusion training are of three 
 classes : — 
 
 ( 1 ) Those which do not require any blending 
 of images, but only simultaneous vision of dis- 
 similar objects with the two eyes. Fig. 14, 
 showing a cage on one slide and a bird on the 
 other, is an example. Other pairs of devices of 
 this class are a clown and a hoop, a mouse and a 
 trap, a clock-face and hands, &c. 
 
 (2) Devices of the second class, of which figs. 
 16 and 17 are examples, require true fusion of 
 images in order that the full picture may be seen. 
 
I2 4 
 
 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 ^w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m n 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 
FUSION TRAINING 
 
 125 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 Fig. 18. 
 
126 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 The pictures on each pair of slides are exactly 
 similar, except that part of the design is omitted 
 in one and a different part in another. For 
 example, in fig 16 a leg is omitted in one slide 
 and the hat in the other. A child who blends 
 the images sees a man with two legs and a 
 hat. 
 
 (3) Devices such as fig. 18 can only be appre- 
 ciated by patients who have the third grade of 
 binocular vision, the sense of perspective. 
 
 The designs are drawn on ij inch squares of 
 thin translucent paper. The paper is then pasted 
 on squares of glass. There is no difficulty in 
 making designs of the first class. Object slides of 
 the second class are made as follows : — I draw, on 
 pieces of paper 1^ inch square, rough, simple 
 pictures, such as a horse, a clown, a cow, a man 
 with a hat and pipe, &c, the more grotesque the 
 better the children seem to like them. I then 
 make two tracings of each on the translucent 
 paper, omitting a different part of the picture in 
 each tracing. 1 
 
 Ftision Training. — The education of the fusion 
 
 1 " Stereoscopic views" are of no practical use whatever 
 for fusion training. But I once had made some tiny trans- 
 parent stereoscopic photographs to fit the amblyoscope. 
 My idea was that a child who wearied of my own artistic 
 efforts might be shown some of these views, occasionally, 
 by way of a change. But I found that young children took 
 no interest in them. They much preferred simple pictures 
 which they could understand. 
 
FUSION TRAINING I 27 
 
 sense should be undertaken at the earliest possible 
 age. I repeat this because it is of supreme import- 
 ance—the only key to success. In the case of a 
 child of average intelligence, it is quite easy to 
 use the amblyoscope at the age of three to three 
 and a half years. I have succeeded in many cases 
 before three years of age, but it is often rather 
 difficult to keep the attention of these very young 
 children. 
 
 The deviating eye must not be too blind. In 
 cases which have received efficient treatment since 
 soon after the first appearance of the deviation, 
 the vision of each eye is nearly always perfect. 
 But, in neglected or inefficiently treated cases, the 
 deviating eye is often very blind. (Compare 
 Tables III. and V., pp. 76 and 77). I do not as 
 a rule attempt fusion-training in a child who, 
 after all possible means have been employed to 
 restore the sight of the deviating eye, is still 
 unable to see the 1 inch ivory ball at six yards. 
 
 A squinter sees with his fixing eye only, or, 
 under certain circumstances, with the deviating 
 eye only, but not with both simultaneously. The 
 first step in the treatment is to overcome this sup- 
 pression. If the child has any refractive error this 
 is corrected by spectacles. It occasionally happens 
 that the mirror test (p. 80) has revealed a slight 
 vertical deviation. In this case corresponding 
 prisms, axes vertical, are inserted in the slots in 
 front of the lenses. Seated in a chair facing the 
 
128 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 lighting apparatus, I take the child on my knee 
 and adapt the amblyoscope' roughly to the angle 
 of his squint. I put in the instrument first a pair 
 of object-slides which requires no fusion, only 
 simultaneous perception — those shown in fig. 15, 
 for example. Each light is at first about 4 feet 
 away from its object slide. Suppose the cage is 
 before the fixing eye and the bird before the 
 squinting eye. The child, on looking into the 
 amblyoscope, will see only the cage. I tell him 
 to look for the bird, while I bring the light before 
 the deviating eye nearer and nearer. At last a 
 point is reached when the illumination of the 
 object-slide before the deviating eye becomes so 
 intense that the vision of this eye can no longer 
 be suppressed. The child suddenly says he sees 
 the bird he was told to look for. But he has now 
 usually lost sight of the cage before the fixing 
 eye. The relative distances of the lights are 
 then readjusted until, after a few minutes of 
 alternation of the vision of the two eyes, the child 
 sees the bird and the cage simultaneously. The 
 child is then allowed to grasp the amblyoscope 
 
 1 I used occasionally to drop the instrument and break 
 some part of it, until Dr. Ernest Maddox suggested the 
 simple expedient of slinging it from the ceiling by means of 
 a string and pulley and little leaden counterpoise. Since 
 then there have been no mishaps. When pulled down 
 ready for use the amblyoscope hangs about 3ft. away from 
 the wall-bracket which supports the lighting apparatus. 
 
FUSION TRAINING I 29 
 
 with both hands, while I, putting my hands over 
 his, converge and diverge the two halves of the 
 instrument, in order to make the bird appear to go 
 in and out of the cage. Other similar pairs of 
 object-slides are then shown. The child soon 
 learns to move the instrument himself, so as to 
 put the bird in the cage, the cat on the chair, the 
 clown in the hoop, &c. One must talk to the child 
 all this time, as it is only by encouraging him to 
 chatter that one learns what he really sees. 
 
 A pair of slides requiring fusion of images is 
 now shown — fig. 16, for example. The child at 
 first sees two men, each picture being imperfect. 
 Soon a position is found in which the child sees 
 one man having two legs and a hat. The bind- 
 ing screw in the long slot is now tightened and 
 that in the short slot loosened, so that the 
 amplitude of movement between the two halves 
 of the amblyoscope is restricted to about io°. 
 Other pairs of slides requiring fusion of images 
 are successively shown the child, and he is en- 
 couraged by one's remarks to examine every part 
 of the fused picture. After a time it is found 
 that the angle of convergence of the instrument 
 may be varied slightly without the fused picture 
 coming to pieces. The child has now, under 
 these special conditions of illumination and con- 
 vergence, the second grade of binocular vision, 
 — true fusion with some amplitude. 
 
 The next step is to increase the amplitude of 
 
130 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 fusion. The intensities of the lights and the 
 angle of convergence of the amblyoscope are 
 arranged as before. Devices requiring fusion, 
 such as figs. 16 and 17, are shown. An attempt 
 is made to gradually diverge and converge the 
 two halves of the instrument, more and more, 
 while the child is examining and talking about 
 the various pictures shown him. After some 
 practice, in the case of a young child, a con- 
 siderable range of movement becomes possible, 
 fusion being still maintained. This "amplitude 
 of fusion " may, for practical purposes, be taken 
 as a measure of the extent to which the fusion 
 faculty has been developed. 
 
 A child who has any considerable amplitude 
 of fusion will nearly always be found to have 
 acquired the third grade of binocular vision also 
 — the sense of perspective. The slides, fig. 18, 
 are shown, and the child is asked whether he is 
 looking at the outside or the inside of the tub. 
 He will at once say " the inside." If these slides 
 are now changed from one tube to the other, he 
 will see the tub bottom up. 
 
 The child having now acquired the highest 
 grade of binocular vision under these special 
 conditions of illumination and convergence, the 
 next step is to gradually equalise the light before 
 the two eyes. This may readily be done, at this 
 stage, without a return of the suppression. 
 
 If the child be young enough, a very powerful 
 
FUSION TRAINING I 3 I 
 
 "desire for fusion" may usually be created in 
 five or six lessons, given at intervals of one week. 
 
 It must be remembered that the prime object 
 of these exercises is the training of the fusion 
 sense at a time when this may be successfully 
 accomplished — not a mere remedying of the 
 deviation. In many cases, however, the powerful 
 " desire for fusion " thus established, directly 
 brings about a sudden cure of the squint. In the 
 larger group of cases, in which optical correction 
 of refractive error is depended upon to lessen, and 
 perhaps overcome, the deviation, there is no 
 danger of the newly-acquired faculty of fusion 
 being lost meanwhile. If even a faint degree of 
 fusion sense has once been acquired, its persis- 
 tence is truly remarkable. No matter how many 
 years binocular vision may be in abeyance, it 
 seems as difficult to forget as the art of swim- 
 ming. If the periodic measurements of the angle 
 of the deviation show that this is not decreasing 
 reasonably quickly under optical treatment, I have 
 no hesitation in operating at any age, by advance- 
 ment of an external rectus, with or without teno- 
 tomy of the rectus internus. The eye being put 
 approximately "straight," the "desire" for bi- 
 nocular vision fills up any slight gap that may 
 remain, and a perfect cure results. 
 
 Fusion training, in the case of these young 
 children, must be carried out by the surgeon him- 
 self. It is of no use giving the amblyoscope, or 
 
I3 2 FUSION TRAINING 
 
 any other instrument, to the mother for use at 
 home. 
 
 In the case of older children, I have often, by 
 way of experiment, ordered some form of stereo- 
 scope, or Cuigriet's (or Javal's) " lecture con- 
 trolee " for home use. I have not, in any single 
 instance, seen any good result therefrom. A 
 child who is old enough for " stereoscopic exer- 
 cises " and "bar reading" is far past the age 
 when the fusion sense might have been developed. 
 Similarly, if he has suffered from neglected con- 
 stant unilateral squint since infancy, it will now 
 almost certainly be impossible to remove the 
 acquired amblyopia of the squinting eye, though 
 it might easily have been done at an earlier age. 
 
 In this description of fusion training I wish to 
 draw attention rather to the principles than to the 
 instruments by the help of which they have been 
 defined and applied. Though these methods 
 have been constantly employed for many years, 
 it is possible that they may be improved upon ; 
 but the principles are unalterable. 
 
*33 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 DIVERGENT SQUINT. 
 
 Comitant divergent squint presents two distinct 
 varieties differing widely in their pathology, 
 appropriate treatment and prognosis. They may 
 be called, respectively, myopic and neuropathic. 
 
 Myopic Divergent Squint. 
 
 The divergence most frequently first makes its 
 appearance at about ten or twelve years of age. 
 It may be either unilateral or alternating, more 
 commonly the former. Usually the patient is 
 known to have been short-sighted for four or five 
 years, and the short-sightedness has been increas- 
 ing, until, at the time of the appearance of the 
 divergence, there is myopia of perhaps 5 or 6 d. 
 or more. As a rule the fusion sense is well- 
 developed, though I have sometimes found it 
 deficient. The deviation is seldom constant ; 
 at one moment the eyes may be " straight " and 
 the patient have binocular vision ; a few minutes 
 later one or other eye may exhibit a high degree 
 of divergence. Myopic divergent squints of low 
 degree are rare. 
 10 
 
134 DIVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 From observing and carefully questioning many 
 of the more intelligent patients, I conclude that 
 the usual mode of origin of a myopic divergent 
 squint is as follows : — Soon after the child begins 
 school it is found that he is not easily able to see 
 the black-board. He is given a front seat where 
 he can see, and nothing more is done. A few 
 years later, say at twelve or thirteen years of age, 
 the myopia has increased so as to bring his far 
 point very near his eyes. All distant objects are 
 blurred. In reading, he has to hold his book so 
 near his eyes that it becomes very difficult to con- 
 verge steadily to the required extent. He com- 
 plains that "the words run into each other" and 
 he soon tires. One frequently hears that, at about 
 this time, he discovered that, by covering one eye 
 with his hand, he could read quite comfortably 
 with the other. In any case, he gives up the 
 struggle and allows one eye to wander outwards, 
 while he reads without effort with the other. At 
 first there is no actual divergence — only a failure 
 to converge while the other eye is engaged in 
 near vision. But, as a result of convergence 
 not being used, the function becomes weakened, 
 so that either eye diverges when screened or when 
 the other is being used in near vision. When 
 the myopic eye has become divergent there is no 
 diplopia in reading, even though the fusion faculty 
 be perfect, because the divergent eye is directed 
 towards the misty distance. When the patient 
 
DIVERGENT SQUINT I35 
 
 looks up from his book, the divergent eye at first 
 always recovers itself. After a time, as the habit 
 becomes confirmed, this eye often remains widely 
 divergent in distant vision. The picture of distant 
 objects formed in the fixing eye is already blurred 
 and indistinct, so the very faint eccentrically-placed 
 image formed in the divergent eye causes no 
 tendency to fusion. But when the divergent eye 
 partially recovers its normal direction, so that it 
 receives a more centrally-placed image of the 
 object to which the fixing eye is directed, the 
 desire to blend these two blurred images causes 
 the eyes to become straight. This probably 
 explains why in a case of myopic divergent squint, 
 the eyes are sometimes straight, sometimes widely 
 divergent, but scarcely ever' divergent to a slight 
 degree. 
 
 The treatment of a case of myopic divergent 
 squint consists in exactly correcting the myopia 
 and myopic astigmatism. The patient should 
 wear the glasses always, both for near and distant 
 vision. Patients at first complain that the glasses 
 make print appear very small. Children soon 
 become accustomed to them. But myopes who 
 first begin to wear glasses in adult life, in some 
 cases, require a second pair of glasses for near 
 vision, 1 d. or 2 d. weaker than the distance 
 glasses. Their power of accommodation has 
 become feeble, for want of exercise. Glasses 
 with which the patient can see distinctly usually 
 
] $6 DIVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 cause a rapid disappearance of the squint, in fairly 
 recent cases, and frequently even in cases which 
 have lasted for many years. But it often happens 
 that the prolonged disuse of the function of 
 dynamic convergence weakens the static conver- 
 gence, so that this becomes a negative quantity, 
 and a tendency to divergence remains. While 
 both eyes are open and the glasses are worn, the 
 fusion faculty prevents any deviation, but if one 
 eye be shaded for a moment it may diverge and 
 remain divergent for a second or two after the 
 removal of the shade. Operation is rarely neces- 
 sary. But in some cases, usually of long standing, 
 in which the static convergence remains very 
 deficient, advancement of an internal rectus adds 
 greatly to the patient's comfort. 
 
 It must not be forgotten that the case may be 
 complicated by muscular exophoria. 
 
 Infantile myopic divergent squint, excluding 
 cases of buphthalmos, is very rare. I have notes 
 of only seven cases. These cases differed from 
 unilateral convergent squints only in the kind of 
 refractive error and the direction of the deviation. 
 The treatment was similar to that employed in 
 convergent squint. 
 
 Neuropathic Divergent Squint. 
 The divergence nearly always dates from in- 
 fancy. It may be constant or occasional, unilateral 
 or alternating. In the constant cases there is a 
 
DIVERGENT SQUINT 137 
 
 total absence of the fusion sense. In the occasional 
 cases there is a feeble degree of binocular vision 
 when the eyes are "straight"; when an eye 
 diverges there is usually no diplopia. The refrac- 
 tion, as a rule, is normal. In the constant uni- 
 lateral cases there may be acquired amblyopia. 
 In other cases the vision of the eye is perfect. 
 The divergence varies greatly in degree, even in 
 a case in which it is constantly present. The 
 power of dynamic convergence is deficient. It 
 varies from time to time in an extraordinary 
 manner. One day, perhaps, the dynamic conver- 
 gence may be almost normal ; a few days later 
 the most persevering efforts may fail to elicit the 
 slightest movement of convergence. In these 
 neuropathic divergent squints, the association 
 between accommodation and convergence is 
 usually very slight. One not infrequently sees a 
 patient who can nearly always voluntarily correct 
 the faulty position of his divergent eye without 
 much effort, but who habitually allows this eye 
 to diverge while he is exercising say 4 or 5 d. of 
 accommodation in near vision. In young subjects 
 the power of rotation of each eye separately is 
 nearly always normal in every direction. In long- 
 standing cases, however, the power of independent 
 inward rotation is usually deficient. 
 
 The subjects of neuropathic divergence are 
 often bright, quick-witted, intelligent, but they are 
 nearly always very " nervous " and highly strung. 
 
138 DIVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 One frequently sees the same ocular defect in 
 other members of the family. A family history 
 of epilepsy or insanity is very common. I find 
 neuropathic divergence more common in females 
 than in males, in the proportion of about 7 to 2. 
 
 The treatment of neuropathic divergent squint 
 is not satisfactory. There is seldom any notable 
 refractive error, and when there is, its correction 
 produces no effect upon the divergence. Attempts 
 at fusion training nearly always fail, however early 
 the patient may be seen. Practically one's only 
 recourse is operation. One or both internal recti 
 should be advanced (e.g., Case B, 166, p. 162). 
 The externi should be tenotomised at the same 
 time only when the power of abversion is dis- 
 tinctly greater than normal. If the power of 
 adversion is very markedly deficient, a musculo- 
 capsular advancement should be performed. In 
 a case in which divergence is not constantly 
 present and in which there is some slight degree 
 of fusion, advancement gives a satisfactory result 
 (e.g., Case B, 165, p. 161). 
 
 non-comitant divergent squints, other than 
 Paralytic. 
 Divergence in extreme myopia.- — In cases ot 
 progressive myopia of very high degree it is not 
 uncommon to find the visual axes divergent. 
 These cases differ entirely from ordinary myopic 
 divergent squints. They are non-comitant. The 
 
DIVERGENT SQUINT I 39 
 
 arcs of rotation of each eye are subnormal in every 
 direction. The divergence begins imperceptibly, 
 and increases slowly up to about 20 . It is 
 generally held that the divergence is caused 
 mechanically, by the egg-shaped eyes adapting 
 their long axes to the divergent positions of the 
 orbits. I believe this explanation to be correct. 
 Increased tension of the external recti does not 
 appear to be an important factor, as I have, in 
 three such cases, seen both these muscles teno- 
 tomised without result. 
 
 Divergence of blind eyes. —When both eyes are 
 blind they almost invariably diverge. When one 
 eye only is blind, its behaviour will depend, to a 
 great extent, upon the state of the refraction of 
 the seeing eye. If this is normal or myopic the 
 blind eye will, as a rule, diverge ; if it is markedly 
 hypermetropic it will usually converge. 
 
 If the refraction of one eye be normal, or nearly 
 so, while the other eye is very highly myopic, the 
 latter is, in the absence of optical correction, 
 practically a blind eye, and will behave as such. 
 
 In a case of convergent squint in which the 
 squinting eye has become very amblyopic, this 
 blind eye may become divergent in after years, 
 without any tenotomy having been performed. 
 
 Divergence secondary to tenotomy of an internal 
 rectus muscle. — As already explained, in a large 
 proportion of cases of convergent squint with 
 hypermetropia, the constant wearing of glasses 
 
140 DIVERGENT SQUINT 
 
 gradually causes the visual axes to become less 
 convergent. It was formerly the practice to 
 tenotomise an internal rectus in almost all cases 
 of convergent squint, without going into the 
 question of refractive error. Such of the hyper- 
 metropes who subsequently took to wearing- 
 convex glasses to improve their vision, ran con- 
 siderable risk of divergence. 
 
 If tenotomy be performed only in cases in 
 which optical treatment has failed, the risk is 
 less. But even then a case of divergence will 
 occasionally be seen. In an ordinary tenotomy 
 the tendon and its lateral expansions are divided. 
 Usually the cut end of the tendon becomes con- 
 nected to its old insertion by an irregular band of 
 scar tissue, which may or may not subsequently 
 stretch. Tenotomy is called a " setting back " of 
 the tendon, because it is supposed that the tendon 
 becomes directly reattached to the globe further 
 back. I believe that this seldom happens after a 
 neatly - performed tenotomy. Sometimes the 
 tendon fails to become reattached to the globe at 
 all. In this case the surgeon may fail to find the 
 muscle unless he knows where to look for it. Its 
 anterior end will be found behind the sunken 
 caruncle, lying against the inner wall of the orbit 
 (see page 213). 
 
I4i 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 THE TREATMENT OF SQUINT. 
 I L L USTRA Tl I T E CA SES. 
 
 The following clinical notes, copied from my 
 squint case-books, will serve to further explain 
 the methods of treatment which I employ, and to 
 show the results which may ordinarily be expected 
 therefrom. 
 
 As a rule, it is only possible to get a perfect 
 result in a case in which efficient treatment is 
 commenced early. But, unfortunately, one sees 
 a very large proportion of the cases for the first 
 time after years of neglect, or perhaps inadequate 
 or even harmful treatment. I have, therefore, 
 also selected some examples of these old cases. 
 
 Case B, 23. February 4, 1896.— A boy, aged 2 years 
 11 months, was brought to me, suffering from conver- 
 gent squint. He had squinted for about ten or twelve 
 months. L. E. was convergent 28 . Fixation was 
 present in L. E., but the sight of this eye had de- 
 teriorated so much that, when R. E. was bandaged, 
 he could not find a white-handled penknife on the 
 floor, unless it was close to his feet. Abversion L. E. 
 was perfect. Ordered, atropine ointment, 1 per cent., 
 thrice daily for both eyes, for retinoscopy. 
 
 February 11. — Convergent squint L. E. 32 with 
 
142 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 atropine. Retinoscopy — each eye + 275 D. sph. 
 + 0-5 d. cyl. ax. vert. Ordered spectacles + 2*25 
 D. sph. + 0*5 D. cyl. ax. vert., also guttas atropine 
 1 per cent, for R. E. only every morning. 
 
 March 3. — Child uses R. E. (atropised) in distant 
 vision, and L. E. (unatropised) in near vision. Con- 
 vergent squint L. E. 20 , with glasses. Ordered, 
 continue. 
 
 April 9. — Similar note. Convergent squint L. E. 
 1 7 . Ordered, continue. 
 
 May 29. — Child now uses (unatropised) L. E. and 
 turns in (atropised) R. E. always, both in near and 
 distant vision. Ordered, stop the drops, and come 
 again in one month. 
 
 June 18. — Squint nearly alternating, slight prefer- 
 ence for squinting with L. E. Convergent squint L. E. 
 1 6°. Ordered, atropine for R. E. only, every morning 
 for a month, then stop it and bring the child to me 
 two or three weeks later. 
 
 August 4. — C. S. alternating 14 . Fusion training 
 with amblyoscope. Child sees both images readily and 
 can sometimes blend them. 
 
 August 7. — Fusion training. 
 
 August 10. — Fusion training. Child blends images 
 readily. 
 
 August 14. — Fusion training. Child has considerable 
 amplitude of fusion. C. S. alternating 15 . 
 
 August 18. — Fusion training. 
 
 August 25. — No squint with glasses. The mother 
 says that the eyes have been straight since the last 
 lesson, though he lias turned the eye in, occasionally, 
 for an instant. 
 
 November 6. — Child never squints now with glasses, 
 though he occasionally does so without them, the 
 nurse says. No squint seen now either with or without 
 glasses. 
 
 October 8, 1897. — Child going on well. He never 
 squints now. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES I 43 
 
 September 29, 1898. — Spectacles too small. Ordered, 
 repeat them. 
 
 June 13, 190 1. — (Aged 8 years 3 months). Ordered, 
 atropine for repetition of the retinoscopy. 
 
 June 20. — Retinoscopy each eye + 2*25 D. sph. 
 + 0-5 D. cyl. ax. vert. Vision, each eye f. Ordered, 
 spectacles 0*5 D. lower than the retinoscopy, with per- 
 mission to take them off while playing games. 
 
 August 19, 1902. — The boy has only used his glasses 
 for school work since last visit, and never when out 
 of doors. He has not been seen to squint for years. 
 
 Case B, 18. November*], 1895. — A girl, aged 2 years 
 1 month, was brought to me, suffering from C. S. R. E. 
 33 . She had squinted since she had whooping cough 
 aged 1 year 4 months. She had central fixation in 
 R. E., but she evidently did not see well with it when 
 the L. E. was tied up. Abversion perfect. Bright, 
 intelligent girl, only child. Mother has C. S. R. E. 
 Ordered, atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
 November 13. — Retinoscopy R. E. + 175 D. sph. 
 L. E. 4- 1-25 D. sph. C. S. R. E. 26 , with atropine. 
 Ordered, spectacles 0*25 D. less than retinoscopy ; also 
 guttae atrophias 1 per cent., one drop in L. E. only, 
 every morning. 
 
 December 11. — Child uses R. E. (unatropised) in 
 near vision, and L. E. (atropised) in distant vision. 
 Ordered, continue. 
 
 February 6, 1896. — Same. Ordered, continue. 
 
 April 2. — Child uses R. E. (unatropised) now, both 
 in near and distant vision, and squints with atropised 
 L. E. C. S. L. E. 27 . Ordered, stop atropine. 
 
 June 4. — Squint alternates 22 . Fusion training 
 with amblyoscope : child readily sees both images, but 
 I cannot be certain that she blends them. 
 
 June 10. — Fusion training : child learned to blend 
 images quite easily. 
 
144 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 June 19. — Fusion training. 
 
 July 1. — Fusion training. 
 
 July 7. — Fusion training. Child now has an ampli- 
 tude of fusion, with the amblyoscope, of io° to 15 . 
 C. S. alternating 23 . As the fusion faculty is well 
 developed and the deviation is stationary, I advised 
 operation, especially as, in view of the insignificance 
 of the refractive error, spectacles can be dispensed 
 with. The parents preferred to wait until the child 
 was 3 years old. Child's fusion was exercised with 
 the amblyoscope once a month until 
 
 October 5 (aged 3 years). — C. S. alternating 22 . I 
 advanced the right external rectus muscle, under 
 chloroform. (I employed the method described in 
 Chapter XII.). 
 
 Case dressed every day. 
 
 October 12. Sutures removed. 
 
 November?,. — R. E. is not opened quite so widely as 
 L. E., and there is still some redness of the conjunctiva. 
 There is no squint now, and the child has perfect 
 binocular vision. She, of course, has not worn her 
 glasses since the operation. 
 
 I saw the little girl in January, 1897, October, 1897, 
 June, 1899, and again on 
 
 November 12, 1902. — I wrote and asked the mother 
 to bring her to me. The child is now nine years old. 
 She has § vision, each eye, and perfect binocular vision. 
 She only dimly recollects that she ever had anything 
 the matter with her eyes. 
 
 Case B. 192. November 20, 1899. — A lady, aged 
 23 years. History — she began to squint with the 
 L. E. when she was about 1 year old. She was treated 
 from time to time with "drops." At about 4 years 
 of age she was ordered glasses. She has worn glasses 
 ever since. When she was 8 years old the L. E., was 
 operated upon (tenotomy). 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES I 45 
 
 She now has convergent squint L. E. i6° both with 
 and without her glasses. Vision of R. E., with glasses, 
 is §. L. E. has lost central fixation, and with it she 
 can just count fingers close to her face. As the result 
 of the tenotomy, the L. E. is prominent and the caruncle 
 sunken. Retinoscopy under homatropine — R. E. + 
 i D. cyl. ax. vert., L. E. + 175 D. cyl. ax. 70 down 
 and out, at approximate macula. The blindness of 
 the left eye is now, of course, quite incurable. She 
 wishes to have something done to remove the deformity. 
 
 December 5. — I advanced the left external rectus 
 muscle, under cocaine (by the method described in 
 Chapter XII.). 
 
 December 20. — There is a little redness remaining 
 from the operation. The eyes are quite " straight," 
 and the advancement has had the effect of replacing 
 the L. E. in its proper position in the orbit. Ordered, 
 rigid pince-nez + 1 D. cyl. ax. vert. 
 
 June 14, 190 1. — Eyes quite normal in appearance, 
 both with and without the glasses. 
 
 Case D, 318. April 13, 1900.— Boy, aged 1 year 
 5 months, seen at Moorfields Hospital. The mother 
 said he had measles in February and he " has squinted 
 the last few weeks." C. S. R. E. 37 . Steady central 
 fixation R. E. Ordered atropine, for retinoscopy. 
 
 April 24. — C. S. R. E. 32 under atropine. Retino- 
 scopy R. E. 4- 5-5 D. sph. L. E. 4- 4*5 D. sph. Or- 
 dered, spectacles R. E. 4- 5 D. L. E. 4- 4 D. Guttae 
 atrophias 1 per cent, to be put in L. E. only every 
 morning. 
 
 May 8. — Child uses (unatropised) R. E. and squints 
 (atropised) L. E. always. Ordered, stop drops. 
 
 June 5. — Squint alternates, 21 . 
 
 August 7. — No squint while wearing glasses. C. S. 
 R. E. about 20 without glasses. 
 
 September 10, 1901. — Glasses too small now, repeat 
 them. 
 
I46 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 November 7, 1902. — No squint seen here either with 
 or without glasses. He is said to turn in R. E. some- 
 times when his glasses are taken off at bedtime. 
 
 Case A., 489. May 10, 1900. — Boy, aged 3 years 
 4 months, seen at the West Ham Hospital. C. S. 
 L. E. 34 . Fixation L. E. was lost. Abversion L. E. 
 full. The mother said he had "squinted on and off 
 for about a year." Ordered, atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
 May 17. — C. S. L. E. 27 with atropine. Retino- 
 scopy — R. E. 4- 375 D. sph. + 075 d. cyl. ax. 25 
 down and out. L. E. approximately the same. Or- 
 dered, spectacles for constant wear, R. E. 4- 3-5 D. 
 sph. 4- 075 D. cyl. ax. 25 down and out. L. E. 4- 
 3-5 D. sph. pro tern. : also R. E. to be occluded by a 
 gauze pad secured by strapping plaster, for one month. 
 
 June 14. — Steady central fixation L. E. Ordered, 
 guttae atropinae 1 per cent, for R. E. only every morn- 
 ing for one month. 
 
 July 12. — Child now uses (atropised) R. E. in distant 
 vision, and turns in L. E. In near vision he uses 
 (unatropised) L. E., and turns in R. E. C. S. L. E. 
 23 . Ordered, continue. 
 
 August 30. — Child uses R. E. distant vision and L. E. 
 near vision. When glasses are taken off, he always 
 fixes with L. E. and turns in the (atropised) R. E. 
 Ordered, continue. 
 
 October 25. — Child uses (unatropised) L. E. and turns 
 in the (atropised) R. E. always, both with and without 
 the glasses. Ordered, stop the atropine and return in 
 one month. 
 
 December 6.— C. S. L. E. io°. The child uses L. E. 
 almost as readily as R. E. Fusion training with 
 amblyoscope. 
 
 December 13. — Fusion training. 
 
 December 20. — Fusion training. Child blends images, 
 but with difficulty. 
 
 January 10, 1901.— Fusion training. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES I 47 
 
 'January 24. — Fusion training. Images blended at 
 once. A fair amplitude of fusion. 
 
 February 7. — No squint with glasses. 
 
 July 11. — No squint with glasses. When glasses 
 are taken off the child has no squint, as a rule ; but 
 when he is told to look at a picture L. E. turns in 
 about 35 to 40 , and he says he sees two books (he 
 volunteered this statement without any questioning). 
 
 May 29, 1902. — Child never squints now. Ordered, 
 atropine for both eyes for repetition of the retinoscopy. 
 
 June 7. — Retinoscopy, R. E. + 3"5 D. sph. + 075 
 D. cyl. ax. 30 down and out. L. E. + 3-5 D. sph. + 1 
 D. cyl. ax. 30 down and out. Vision with these glasses 
 R. E. I, L. E. f . Ordered, spectacles 0*5 D. less than 
 the retinoscopy. 
 
 Case D, 832. May 6, 1902. — A boy, aged 9^ years, 
 was brought to the Royal London Ophthalmic Hos- 
 pital, because he could not see with the right eye. The 
 father said that the boy squinted when he was teething. 
 He was taken to an eye hospital where he was given 
 ointment (probably atropine) for both eyes for about 
 a year. At about 3^ years of age he was given glasses. 
 The glasses gradually " cured the squint but the sight 
 of the eye, which used to squint, is almost gone." 
 
 The boy is wearing + 4 D. sph. each eye. Vision 
 with his glasses — R. E. counts fingers at two feet, 
 L. E. §. Fixation R. E. is, of course, lost. He has 
 C. S. R. E. 4 , with his glasses. Abversion R. E. full. 
 Ordered, atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
 May 9. — Retinoscopy L. E. -f 4 D. sph. + id. cyl. 
 ax. vert. R. E. approximately the same. Vision with 
 glasses — R. E. not improved, L. E. f. Ordered, spec- 
 tacles 0*5 D. less than retinoscopy. The blindness is 
 now of so long standing that it would be quite hopeless 
 to attempt to restore the sight of the R. E. 
 
 Case A, 58. April 23, 1894. I saw a girl, aged 
 
I48 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 2 years 3 months. Alternating C. S. about 30 . She 
 had squinted since early infancy. 
 
 April 26, 1894. — Retinoscopy under atropine. — Each 
 eye 4- 1*5 D. sph. Ordered, 4- 1*25 D. sph. 
 
 November j, 1895. — C. S. alternating 32 . Attempted 
 fusion training with amblyoscope. 
 
 During November, 1895, I made six attempts to 
 train the child's fusion sense. Though she was a 
 tractable and intelligent child, I did not succeed in 
 getting even simultaneous perception of the object 
 slides. She could see one picture or the other, but 
 she could not see both together. (Case of essentially 
 alternating squint, with total absence of the fusion 
 sense.) 
 
 August, 1900. — The girl came to me at the West 
 Ham Hospital. She has not worn the glasses for two 
 or three years. Two years ago she went to another 
 hospital, where the right internal rectus muscle was 
 tenotomised. C. S. alternating 19 now. Vision fi 
 each eye. 
 
 October, 1900. I advanced the right external rectus 
 muscle, under cocaine. 
 
 November 8, 1900. — The eyes are " straight " and 
 normal in appearance. The vision of each eye sep- 
 arately is perfect. But of course she can neve: 
 have binocular vision. No glasses required. 
 
 Juue 12, 1902. — Eyes normal in appearance, patient 
 comfortable. 
 
 Case B, 3. — May 22, 1893. I saw a girl, aged 1 year 
 5 months. She had C. S. R. E. about 35 . She had 
 squinted for six or seven months. R. E. has not lost 
 the power of central fixation. Ordered, atropine for 
 retinoscopy. 
 
 May 25. — Retinoscopy each eye + 4 D. sph. Or- 
 dered, glasses each eye 4- 3'5 £>• sph. : also, gutta* 
 atropine 1 per cent. L. E. only every morning. 
 
 June 26, 1893. — Glasses worn well. When the child 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES 149 
 
 is induced to look at anything close to the eyes, she 
 uses the R. E. (unatropised) and turns in the (atropised) 
 L. E. At other times she has C. S. R. E. about 30 . 
 Ordered, continue drops for L. E. only. 
 
 July 28.— Child uses L. E. (atropised) in distant 
 vision and R. E. (unatropised) in near vision. When 
 glasses are taken off, she always uses R. E. and squints 
 with (atropised) L. E. Ordered, continue. 
 
 September 5.— Child always uses R. E. and squints 
 with the (atropised) L. E. both in near and distant 
 vision. Ordered, stop the atropine. 
 
 April 23, 1894.— C. S. nearly alternating. More 
 often fixes with the R. E., which was at first the squint- 
 ing eye. C. S. 21 . 
 
 November 6th, 1895. — Owing to my absence abroad 
 the child was left much longer than she should have 
 been. C. S. L. E. 13 . Ordered, atropine for repeti- 
 tion of retinoscopy. 
 
 November 13. Retinoscopy + 3-5 D. sph. + 0-5 
 D. cyl. ax. vert, each eye. Ordered, glasses 0*5 D. less 
 than the retinoscopy. As the child now squinted 
 constantly with L. E. (the originally fixing eye) I 
 ordered atropine to be put in the R. E. only every 
 morning. 
 
 November 27.— She uses R. E. (atropised) in distant 
 vision and L. E. (unatropised) in near vision. Ordered, 
 continue. 
 
 December 20. — Child now uses L. E. almost always 
 in preference to the (atropised) R. E. Ordered, stop 
 atropine. 
 
 January 15, 1896.— C. S. nearly alternating n°. 
 Fusion training. 
 
 January 20. — Fusion training. 
 
 January 27. — Fusion training. Child blends images. 
 
 February 4. — Fusion training. Child has some am- 
 plitude of fusion. 
 
 February 13. — Fusion training. Considerable ampli- 
 tude of fusion. 
 11 
 
15O TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 February 20. — Child has frequently said that she 
 sees two faces, &c., since last visit. Fusion training. 
 
 February 27. — No squint. 
 
 June 5. — No squint with glasses. C. S., with dip- 
 lopia, when glasses are taken off. Diplopia is so in- 
 tense that the little girl remarks it at once. 
 
 October 19, 1898. — Glasses too small. Ordered, 
 repeat the glasses, with larger frames. The child is 
 never seen now to squint. Vision R. E. £, L. E. (the 
 originally fixing eye) § easily, | partly. 
 
 October 24, 1902. — At my request, the mother brings 
 the child (aged now 9 years 10 months) to me again 
 for examination. She has grade III. binocular vision, 
 with a good amplitude of fusion. She never squints 
 now, either with or without her glasses. She must 
 always wear glasses, of course, on account of her 
 refractive error, but I have given her permission to 
 dispense with them during her dancing lessons and 
 gymnasium practice. 
 
 CASE A, 437. January 18, 1900. — I saw a boy, aged 
 3 years 7 months, at the West Ham Hospital. He 
 began to squint, aged 2 years 10 months, during con- 
 v.ikseence from scarlet fever. Squint was at first 
 occasional. It became constant after a few weeks. 
 C. S. R. E. 42 . Good fixation K. E. Ivory ball test 
 shows that R. E. has at least T '\, vision. Ordered, 
 atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
 January 25.— C. S. R. E. 44 with atropine. Re- 
 tinoscopy— R. E. + 475 !) - s P h - + r 75 D - c y l ax - 
 70" down and in. L. E. + 475 D. Sph. + 1 D. cyl. ax. 
 70 down and in. Ordered, spectacles 075 n. less than 
 the retinoscopy : also, guttae atropine L. E. only every 
 morning. 
 
 February 8.— The boy uses the unatropised R. E. 
 always, both in near and distant vision. C. S. 32 
 with glasses. Ordered, stop drops. 
 
 Dining March and April exereises with the amblyo- 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES 1 5 I 
 
 scope were carried out six times. They resulted in a 
 fairly well-developed fusion sense with an amplitude 
 of fusion of about io°. 
 
 April 26. — C. S. alternating 27 . 
 
 June 7. — C. S. 21 . Fusion training. 
 
 (In a case in which I have succeeded in developing 
 the fusion sense, but in which there is still a consider- 
 able degree of deviation, the next step in the treatment 
 will depend upon measurements of the angle of the 
 deviation at each visit. If this is decreasing at a reason- 
 able rate, the patient is given fusion training once 
 every four or five weeks. This is quite sufficient to 
 preserve the fusion faculty, while optical treatment is 
 being tried. If, however, the improvement ceases, so 
 that nothing more is to be expected from the wearing 
 of glasses, operation becomes necessary.) 
 
 July 12. — C. S. 16 . Fusion training. 
 
 August 16. — C. S. 12 . Fusion training. 
 
 September 27. No squint with glasses. Good bin- 
 ocular vision. The mother says that the eyes became 
 straight soon after the last visit. He squints, some- 
 times when the glasses are off. When the glasses are 
 taken off here, in the light he does not squint ; but, in 
 the dark room, he turns in one or other eye most of 
 the time. 
 
 July 3, 1902. — The boy lost his glasses yesterday. 
 There is no squint in distant vision, even without the 
 glasses. But when he is told to pick out the letters 
 on a card he uses his L. E. and turns in the R. E. to 
 an extreme degree. He then covers the R. E. with 
 his hand. Ordered, repeat glasses. 
 
 Case A, 503. June 7, 1900. — A girl, 1 aged 5 months, 
 
 1 On October 23rd, 1902, a sister of this patient, an 
 infant aged 14 weeks, was brought to me at the West 
 Ham Hospital. She had C.S.L.E. about 30 . On October 
 30th retinoscopy under atropine + 6 d. sph. each eye. I 
 
152 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 brought to me at the West Ham Hospital. She has 
 squinted constantly with the L. E. since she was twelve 
 weeks old. She has C. S. L. E. about 25 , variable. 
 Fixation lost L. E. Abversion L. E. full. Ordered, 
 continuous occlusion R. E., by a pad and bandage, for 
 fourteen days : also. ung. atropinae 1 per cent, thrice 
 daily, for both eyes, for retinoscopy. 
 
 June 21. — Steady central fixation L. E. Under 
 atropine, angle of squint varies from about 20 to 40°. 
 Retinoscopy R. E. + 5-5 D. sph., L. E. 4- 6-5 D. sph. 
 
 Ordered, spectacles, of the pattern described on page 
 102. R. E. 4- 5 D., L. E. + 6 d. Ordered also, ung. 
 atropinae 1 per cent., to be put into the R. E. only 
 every morning. 
 
 August 16. — Glasses worn well, child seems to be 
 quite unconscious of their presence. There is no 
 squint in distant vision. When looking at anything 
 near at hand the infant turns in the R. E. (atropiscd). 
 Ordered, stop the atropine. 
 
 October 8. — No deviation with glasses. When glasses 
 are taken off L. E. turns in to a variable degree — about 
 30 usually. 
 
 May 9, 1901. — No Squint with glasses. 
 
 October 3. — Glasses too small. Ordered, repeat them. 
 
 August 28, 1902. — Glasses were lost ten days ago. 
 The child is not squinting now, even without the 
 glasses. Ordered, repeat the glasses. 
 
 September 25. — No squint with glasses or without 
 
 ordered + 5^5 D. and sunt her to Mr. Hawes, of Leaden- 
 hall Street, who fitted spectacles of the pattern described 
 on page 105. When I saw her on November 6th she had 
 had the spectacles two days. She was wearing them quite 
 happily. Atropine was used for the fixing eye only until 
 the squint alternated. I last saw her on June 7th, 1904, 
 she had no deviation while wearing the glasses, and prism 
 test in the dark room showed that the natural development 
 of binocular vision was proceeding. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES 153 
 
 them. When a lighted match was held before the 
 child's eyes in the dark room, she of course looked at 
 it. A prism, apex towards the nose, was then slipped 
 before one eye. This eye was immediately seen to 
 make a slight inward rotation (in order to blend the 
 images of the light), showing that the child had bin- 
 ocular vision. 
 
 (I do not think that hypermetropes, during the first 
 three or four months of life, as a rule make any pro- 
 longed effort of accommodation in the interests of 
 sharp vision. But some infants, this girl, for example, 
 evidently do so. The abnormal accommodative effort 
 caused an abnormal dynamic convergence, which was 
 soon succeeded by a static convergence, before the 
 period at which the fusion sense, normally, has made 
 much progress in development. By giving her a pair 
 of spectacles, and so relieving the strain on the accom- 
 modation, the visual axes were, in the course of four 
 or five weeks, brought back to parallelism. This 
 allowed the natural development of the fusion sense 
 to take place. The child, in spite of the high refractive 
 error, is perfectly cured, whether she wears glasses or 
 not. Nothing but an actual muscular paralysis will 
 ever make this child squint again. 
 
 The case of this child's sister is exactly similar. 
 
 If I had followed the practice recommended in the 
 text-books, of leaving the case until the child was 
 "old enough to wear glasses," she would then have 
 had an incurable squint, and almost total blindness 
 of the left eye. 
 
 Case B, 227. — May 16, 1900.— A girl, aged 16 years. 
 Her right eye is nearly blind. It turns out and down, 
 and is very prominent — a hideous deformity— the result 
 of two tenotomies six years ago. 
 
 History.— She had whooping-cough soon after she 
 was one year old. During convalescence the R. E. 
 turned in towards the nose. She was taken to an 
 
154 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 ophthalmic surgeon at once. Being considered to be 
 too young for glasses, she was ordered atropine drops 
 for both eyes. The drops were used for both eyes, for 
 from a year and a half to two years. (How often one 
 hears this disastrous tale !) Soon after she was three 
 years old she was ordered spectacles. At the age of 
 10 years, the right eye was operated upon, in London 
 (tenotomy of internal rectus). A year later this eye 
 was again operated upon in Germany. After the 
 second operation the R. E. was " straight." Soon 
 after that it began to turn out and down. This de- 
 formity has gradually got worse. 
 
 At present R. E. is very prominent : it turns out 
 28° and down 10". With this eye she can just dis- 
 tinguish hand movements close to the face. Power 
 of adversion R. E. is absent. She is wearing spectacles 
 + 175 D. sph. each eye. Vision L. E. | both with 
 and without glasses. Retinoscopy — with homatropine 
 L. E. + 2-25 D., R. E. + 3*5 D. at approximate 
 macula. 
 
 Of course, the blindness of the R. E. is now quite 
 incurable. With a view to remedying the deformity, 
 1 advised that the divergence should be dealt with by 
 operation first, and the vertical deviation at a subse- 
 quent operation. 
 
 May 21. — Having cocainised the eye, I stripped up 
 from the globe the membranes on the nasal side, from 
 near the edge of the cornea to the sunken caruncle. 
 1 found the internal rectus muscle behind the sunken 
 caruncle, near the inner wall of the orbit. It was not 
 attached to the globe in any way. As the muscle was 
 much wasted, I decided to advance the conjunctiva, 
 and capsule of Tenon also. 1 seized all these struc- 
 tures with forceps, and drew them between the jaws 
 of a Prince's advancement forceps. 1 secured these- 
 structures, by my usual method, to the circum-corneal 
 fibrous tissue, bringing the eye into a position of very 
 slight convergence. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES 155 
 
 j une 16.— I advanced the right superior rectus 
 muscle. 
 
 j une 30.— There is still some redness of the eye. 
 The advancements have drawn back the eye into its 
 proper position in the orbit. In ordinary directions 
 of the gaze the eyes appear quite straight. But, when 
 the patient looks more than about 15 to the right, 
 the right eye ceases to follow the movement of the 
 left. This is because, owing to the wasted condition 
 of the internal rectus muscle, 1 did not dare to rely 
 upon the muscle alone, but was compelled to advance 
 the membranes also. But it is easy for the patient to 
 conceal this defect, by avoiding wide excursions of 
 the eyes. I ordered pince-nez + 2 D. sph. 
 
 July 5, 1902. — Patient does not wear her glasses out 
 of doors. She always wears them indoors. The eyes 
 are quite natural in appearance. 
 
 Case d, Si. September 27, 1S99 .— Boy, aged 6 years 
 5 months, seen at Moorfields. C. S. L. E. 27 . Ab- 
 version D. E. very slightly deficient. He began to 
 squint during convalescence from measles, aged 2\ 
 years. He has had no treatment. Ordered, atropine 
 for retinoscopy. 
 
 September 30.— Retinoscopy each eye + 3 D. sph. 
 4- 075 D. cyl. ax. vert. Vision R. E. -£, L. E. /«. 
 Ordered, spectacles 0*5 D. less than the retinoscopy : 
 also, gutta3 atropine 1 per cent, every morning R. E. 
 only. 
 
 November 4. — Boy uses R. E. (atropised) in distant 
 vision and L. E. (unatropised) in near vision. C. S. 
 L. E. 1 6°. V. L. E. T V Ordered, continue drops 
 R. E. only. 
 
 January 3, 1900.— C. S. L. E. ii°. V. L. E. T % 
 partly. Boy too old for fusion training. Ordered, 
 continue for four months. 
 
 May 2.— C. S. L. E. 6°. V. L. E. T % partly. Or- 
 dered, continue drops for R. E. for two months more. 
 
1 56 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 July 4 .-C. S. L. E. 5 . V. L. E. & partly. Or- 
 dered, stop drops. 
 
 February 6, 1901. — With the glasses there is no 
 apparent squint, but the mirror test reveals a con- 
 vergent squint of 2 . C. S. about 15 when the glasses 
 are taken off. V. R. E. f., L. E. & partly. 
 
 Case D, 734. November 29, 1901. — Girl, aged 4 
 years 8 months. C. S. R. E. 22 . Abversion perfect. 
 The power of central fixation of R. E. is lost. The 
 eye is so blind that, when the good eye is tied up, she 
 is unable to see a penny on the floor at her feet. She 
 hears it drop, and goes down on her knees to feel for 
 it. The mother says that the squint began at about 
 
 2 years of age, during an attack of scarlet fever. She 
 says she repeatedly spoke to the doctor about it, but 
 he told her to " wait to see if the child would grow out 
 of the squint ! " Ordered, atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
 December 3. — C. S. R. E. 26 with atropine. Retino- 
 scopy R. E. 4- 3 D. sph. at approximate macula. L. E. 
 + 3 D. sph. Ordered, spectacles + 2*5 d. sph. each 
 eye : also L. E. to be continuously occluded by a 
 gauze pad and strapping. 
 
 January 3, 1902. — When the eye was at first tied 
 up, she used to fall over things, the mother says. Later, 
 she could see to run about very well. Child has now 
 central fixation R. E. Ordered, discontinue pad ; 
 guttae atrophia.' 1 per cent, to be put into L. E. only, 
 every morning. Child to go to school and use the eyes 
 in near vision as much as possible. 
 
 February 6. — Child uses (atropised) L. E. in distant 
 vision, and (unatropised) R. E. 111 near vision. Ordered, 
 continue atropine L. E. only. 
 
 May 2. — With glasses child uses (atropised) L. E. 
 in distant vision, and (unatropised) R. E. in near vision. 
 When the glasses air off she ums the l\. E. and turns 
 in L. E. always. C. S. R. E. [6° with glasses. Or- 
 dered, continue atropine L. E. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE (ASKS 157 
 
 October 3.— Vision R. E. with glasses T % easily. C. S. 
 R. E. 13°. Ordered, continue atropine L. E. only. 
 
 December 2. — Child uses (unatropised) R. E. now 
 always, both in near and distant vision, and turns in 
 the (atropised) L. E. C. S. L. E. 14 . Vision R. E. 
 I with difficulty ; f easily ; L. E. f . 
 
 (In private practice, I should have aimed at a per- 
 fect cure of the squint, by training the fusion sense. 
 But, in a crowded hospital clinic, it is, unfortunately, 
 not possible to find time for fusion training, except 
 in a very small proportion of the cases. But it is 
 something to have restored the sight of the blind eye.) 
 
 Case A, 541. August 9, 1900.— A boy, aged 16 years, 
 came to me at West Ham Hospital. He had squinted 
 with L. E. since infancy. He had worn glasses since 
 he was 4 years old. He was wearing 4- 3*5 D - s P h - 
 each eye. Vision with glasses, R. E. f, L. E. fo He 
 had C. S. L. E. n°, with his glasses. His glasses were 
 found to be suitable. Adversion L. E. good. Dynamic 
 convergence good. It was, of course, much too late 
 to attempt to restore the sight of the left eye. He 
 wished to have the deformity removed. 
 
 Under cocaine and supra-renal extract, I performed 
 complete central tenotomy of left internal rectus by 
 the method described on page 216. 
 
 August 16. — Scarcely any redness remaining. C. S. 
 L. E. 3 , with his glasses. This small squint is quite 
 masked by the angle gamma. 
 
 May 8, 1902.— Patient has, with his glasses, C. S. 
 L. E. 4 . There is no noticeable deformity. 
 
 Case B, 19. November 12, 1895.— A girl, aged 
 3 years 1 month. She began to squint during con- 
 valescence from measles, aged 1 year 10 months. 
 Squint was, at first, occasional. It soon became con- 
 stant. She has now C. S. alternating 36 . Ordered, 
 atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
158 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 November 16. — C. S. alternating 32 , with atropine. 
 Ketinoscopy, each eye, + 5 D. sph. + 1 D. cyl. ax. 
 vert. Ordered, glasses + 4 '5 D. sph. + i D. cyl. ax. 
 vert. 
 
 November 27. — C. S. alternating 28 , with glasses. 
 Fusion training with amblyoscope. 
 
 December 5.— Fusion training. Child easily fuses 
 images. 
 
 December 18. — Fusion training. 
 
 January 10, 1896. — Fusion training. Child has an 
 amplitude of fusion of at least io°. C. S. 18 with 
 glasses. 
 
 January 18. — Fusion training. 
 
 February 12. — Fusion training. Child can follow the 
 images through a range of 15 or 20 . C. S. 12 . 
 
 March 11. — Fusion training. C. S. io°. 
 
 March 30. — No squint with glasses. 
 
 October 8. — No squint. Glasses worn comfortably. 
 
 August 21, 1897. — Child never squints now. Or- 
 dered, similar glasses in larger frames. 
 
 July 7, 1899. The girl never squints now, even when 
 the glasses are taken off ; but she must, of course, 
 continue to wear the glasses on account of her high 
 refractive error. 
 
 CASE B, II., 57. January 13, 1902. A girl, aged 
 1 1 years 5 months. Histoty. She began to squint 
 with L. E. when she was 6 years old. She has squinted 
 with this eye constantly ever since. When she was 
 about 8 years old she had glasses. In April, 1899, the 
 left internal rectus muscle was tenotomised, and in 
 June, 1899, the right also. 
 
 She now has convergent squint L. E. 15°, with the 
 glasses. Her vision, with her glasses, is g each eye. 
 She has a faint homonymous diplopia when she looks 
 for it. On examining her fusion sense with the am- 
 blyoscope she readily blends images, but has almost 
 no amplitude of fusion. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES 159 
 
 January 24.— Retinoscopy under atropine, each eye, 
 + 3-5 D. sph. + 1-5 D. cyl. ax. 30 down and out. This 
 very nearly corresponds with the glasses she has been 
 wearing. 
 
 February 12. —By my direction, the glasses have 
 been left off for the last twenty-four hours. Without 
 glasses, R. E. fixing, the deviation is 22 . L. E. fixing, 
 the deviation is 35 . (Approximate estimation by 
 mirror test). 
 
 I advanced the left external rectus muscle (under 
 cocaine), of course without tenotomising the internal 
 rectus. Eyes " straight " after operation. 
 
 February 19. — Removed sutures. Mirror test shows 
 binocular fixation. 
 
 February 28.— The patient had binocular vision, 
 both with and without her glasses, but the amplitude 
 of fusion is very small. 
 
 June 18.— Since the operation I have, by way of 
 experiment, attempted to increase the amplitude of 
 fusion, but of course without success. She has now 
 just the same small degree of fusion sense which she 
 had when she began to squint, and which she has 
 had ever since — neither more nor less. But an accu- 
 rately performed advancement has enabled her to use 
 this feeble fusion sense. The eyes are exactly straight 
 and the child has binocular vision. 
 
 The reason of the good vision in the deviating eye 
 is the unusually late onset of the deviation. Am- 
 blyopia from disuse is scarcely ever acquired after six 
 years of age. 
 
 Case B, 33. May 5, 1896.— Boy, aged 2 years 
 7 months. The right eye turned in suddenly a little 
 before he was two years old. He has squinted con- 
 stantly ever since. C. S. R. E. 27 . Central fixation 
 R. E. With R. E. he can with difficulty see the i| inch 
 ivory ball at four yards. Abversion each eye perfect. 
 Ordered, atropine for retinoscopy. 
 
l6o TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 May 12. — Under atropine C. S. R. E. 30". Retino- 
 scopy, each eye + 2*25 D. sph. Ordered, spectacles 
 + 2 D. sph. constant wear : also guttae atrophia? 1 per 
 cent. L. E. only, every morning. 
 
 July 3. — Child uses the R. E. (unatropised) in neat- 
 vision and the L. E. (atropised) in distant vision. C. S. 
 R. E. 21 with glasses. Ordered, continue. 
 
 August 26. — Same. C. S. R. E. 18 . Ordered, con- 
 tinue. 
 
 October 12. — The boy uses the (unatropised) R. E.„ 
 and turns in the (atropised) L. E., nearly always now, 
 even in distant vision. Ordered, continue. 
 
 November 6. — C. S. L. E. always now 12 . Ordered, 
 stop atropine. 
 
 November 27. — Squint alternates now o°. Fusion 
 training with amblyoscope. 
 
 December 4. — Fusion training. Child readily blends 
 images, but he has at present no amplitude of 
 fusion. 
 
 December 10. — Fusion training. 
 
 December 14. — Fusion training. 
 
 December 16. — Fusion training. 
 
 December 19. — Fusion training. Good amplitude of 
 fusion. 
 
 January 22, 1897. — No squint. 
 
 August 12. — Child wears his glasses. No squint. 
 
 October 25, 1898. — Child never squints now. 
 
 July 18, 1899 — The boy does not squint even when 
 tlie -lasses are taken oil. 
 
 June 13, 1902. — Ordered, atropine for retinoseopv. 
 
 June 18.— Retinoseopv R. E. + 175 I), sph. + 0*25 
 D. cyl., L. E. + 175 i). sph. Vision ;; each eve. 
 Ordered, glasses for near work + 175 D. sph. No 
 glasses to be worn out of sehool. To be seen again in 
 three months. 
 
 September 22. — The boy gets on well without glasses. 
 He prefers not to use them even for sehool work. He 
 never squints now. 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES l6l 
 
 Case B., 165. July 19, 1899.— Girl, aged 3 years 
 5 months. Since earliest infancy R. E. had turned 
 out occasionally : worse during the last year. Never 
 any diplopia. Always a delicate and timid child. 
 
 The eyes sometimes fix hinocularly, but more often 
 R. E. is widely divergent. When the child is spoken 
 to the eyes recover their normal relative directions 
 immediately, but when she looks at a near object the 
 R. E. is usually allowed to diverge. Dynamic con- 
 vergence very deficient. All separate movements of 
 each eye perfect. With L. E. the child easily sees 
 the ^ inch ivory ball at six yards. With R. E. she can 
 with difficulty see the 1^ inch ball at three yards. 
 R. E. has not lost central fixation. Amblyoscope test 
 shows that the child has some slight degree of fusion 
 sense. 
 
 July 26. — Retinoscopy under atropine, each eye + 
 1*25 D. sph. No glasses ordered. Ordered, guttae 
 atrophias sulph. 1 per cent. L. E. only every morning. 
 
 August 22. — Child now uses L. E. (atropised) for 
 distance, and R. E. (unatropised) in near vision. 
 Ordered, continue. 
 
 October 27. — Child uses R. E. in near vision and 
 sometimes in distant vision also. W T ith R. E. she can 
 easily see the f inch ivory ball at six yards. Ordered, 
 atropine L. E. only every morning, first seven days in 
 each month, for six months. 
 
 September 20, 1900. — Divergence is nearly alternating. 
 Still some preference for fixing with L. E. 
 
 July 16, 1902. — Divergence almost always present 
 now. V. R. E. -I partly, V. L. E. f. 
 
 July 29. — Advancement R. internal rectus muscle, 
 under cocaine. Patient kept in bed with both eyes 
 bandaged for one week after. Stitches then removed. 
 Two days later all dressings discontinued. 
 
 August 26. — Eyes "straight." Child blends images 
 except on looking to extreme R. 
 
 (The feeble degree of fusion sense which developed 
 
1 62 TREATMENT OF SQUINT 
 
 in early childhood was nut sufficient to prevent the 
 deviation, or even to cause diplopia, but now that the 
 deviation has been overcome by operation it enables 
 her to fuse the two images.) 
 
 Case B, 166. July 19, 1899. — Girl, aged 8 years 2 
 months, sister of the preceding case. Alternating 
 divergent squint of variable degree, usually about 35 . 
 Association between accommodation and convergence 
 almost absent. Separate movements each eye normal, 
 except adversion, which is slightly deficient. Fusion 
 sense absent. H.m. 0-5 D. No As. V. each eye f. 
 Child has worn spectacles + 075 D. sph. for about 
 three years. Recommended advancement of one or 
 both internal recti for cosmetic reasons. No glasses 
 required. 
 
 August 22. — Advancement R. internal rectus, under 
 cocaine (of course without tenotomy of externus.) 
 
 November 8. — Advancement L. internal rectus. 
 
 December 20. — No noticeable deformity now. Eyes 
 appear to be quite normally directed. Mirror test, 
 however, shows that there is sometimes slight diverg- 
 ence and sometimes slight convergence. Of course 
 there is no fusion : she really uses the eyes alternately, 
 although she appears to use them together. 
 
 October 5, 1904. — Condition as at last visit five years 
 ago. 
 
 Casio A, 79. December 5, [895. Girl, aged 16 years. 
 Eyes are already under atropine. L. E. is widely 
 divergent. When told to look at a near object she can, 
 by an effort, overcome the deviation, but the eye soon 
 diverges again. Adversion slightly deficient. Patient is 
 known to have been "short-sighted for some years; 
 getting worse." Four or five years ago L. E. turned 
 out, occasionally at first, but during the last year 
 constantly. She often sees double. Small myopic 
 crescent each eve. Choroidal vessels seen. Retino- 
 
ILLUSTRATIVE CASES I 63 
 
 scopy R. E. — 6-5 I), spli. V. | partly. L. E. - 
 6*5 D. sph. — 175 D. cyl. ax. 15 down and out. 
 V. f. Ordered, full correction to be worn con- 
 stantly. 
 
 February 13, 1896. — When she Hrst began to wear 
 the glasses they made her head ache, but she soon 
 became accustomed to them. Now she finds them 
 quite comfortable. No divergence now. When she 
 is tired she " squints and sees double for a moment 
 until the eyes come straight again." While wearing 
 the glasses either eye diverges when screened, about 
 20 . 
 
 October 8. — Glasses very comfortable. No headaches. 
 No divergence. Behind Maddox rod either eye turns 
 out 12 , varies slightly. 
 
 September 23, 1897. — Retinoscopy under atropine 
 shows that the myopia has increased 075 D. Ordered, 
 continue same glasses. 
 
 July 20, 1899. She is never seen to squint, but 
 says that she occasionally sees double for a moment. 
 Behind Maddox rod either eye diverges 8° or 9 . 
 
 July 27. Retinoscopy under atropine. R. E. — 
 7-5 D. sph. V. § L. E. - 75 D. sph. - 175 D. cyl. 
 ax. 12 down and out. V. f. Ordered, full correction, 
 to be worn constantly. 
 
 August 20, 1903. — Eyes comfortable. Never any 
 divergence. Exophoria is now only 2 . 
 
 August 27. — Retinoscopy under atropine shows that 
 the myopia has increased less than 0-5 D. during the 
 last four years. 
 
,6 4 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 HETEROPHORIA. 
 
 If a person, with a perfectly normal pair of 
 eyes, looks steadily at any object, both visual 
 axes will continue to be accurately directed to 
 that object, even though one eye be shaded. 1 n 
 other words, his perfectly balanced motor coordi- 
 nations are able to maintain the normal relative 
 directions of the eyes, even when the controlling 
 influence of the fusion sense is temporarily with- 
 drawn. This state of perfect oculo-motor equi- 
 librium is called orthophoria. 
 
 Heterophoria is the name given to the con- 
 dition of imperfect oculo-motor balance. There 
 is here a tendency for the eyes to deviate from 
 their normal relative directions. Ordinarily, how- 
 ever, this tendency is kept in check by the fusion 
 sense, so that there is no squint. But if binocular 
 vision be temporarily rendered impossible — e.g., 
 by covering one eye — this tendency gives rise to 
 an actual deviation. 
 
 Heterophoria of sufficient degree to cause 
 trouble is not very common. Of those who suffer 
 from "asthenopic symptoms," in only a very 
 small proportion of cases are the symptoms found 
 
HETEROPHORIA. 1 65 
 
 to be due to heterophoria. Occasionally, how- 
 ever, one meets with a patient who complains of 
 pain and discomfort in the eyes, and whose refrac- 
 tion has been repeatedly examined, and who has 
 for years worn glasses to correct some unim- 
 portant refractive error, without any relief to his 
 suffering. Such a patient usually has a hetero- 
 phoria, the correction of which immediately and 
 permanently removes his trouble. 
 
 Heterophoria may perhaps be due to a muscle 
 or group of muscles being too weak or too strong 
 for the opponents, or to an abnormal position of 
 insertion of a tendon, whereby the muscle acts at 
 less or more than its normal mechanical advan- 
 tage, or to a muscle or group of muscles being 
 too feebly, or too powerfully, innervated. As a 
 rule, we are unable to determine whether the fault 
 lies in the muscles themselves, or in their innerva- 
 tions. We can only say that certain actions are 
 deficient or excessive. Heterophoria is essen- 
 tially a motor anomaly. 
 
 Squint, on the other hand, is essentially due 
 to a defect of the fusion faculty. In the presence 
 of this fundamental cjiuse, heterophoria may give 
 rise to a permanent squint with suppression of one 
 image : not otherwise. 
 
 There is an apparent exception to this rule — a 
 person who has previously enjoyed perfect bino- 
 cular vision may have the visual acuity of one 
 eye so lowered by progressive myopia, injury, or 
 12 
 
I 66 HETEROPIIORIA 
 
 disease as to render binocular vision impossible. 
 Any heterophoria which may be present will then 
 cause a manifest squint, although the cerebral 
 faculty of fusion remains perfect. 
 
 Heterophoria is the generic name, invented by 
 Stevens, for all latent tendencies to deviation. 
 Distinctive names are employed to indicate the 
 direction of the tendency : — 
 
 Esophoria is a tendency to abnormal static 
 convergence of the visual axes. 
 
 Exophoria is a tendency to divergence of the 
 visual axes. 
 
 Hyperphoria is a tendency of the two eyes to 
 rotate vertically in opposite directions, so that 
 one visual axis shall lie in a higher plane than 
 the other. The eye which tends to turn upwards 
 is called the hyperphoric eye. 
 
 Cyclophoria is a tendency to abnormal rotation 
 of one or both eyes round a fore-and-aft axis, so 
 that what should be the vertical meridian of the 
 eye shall be no longer parallel to the median 
 plane of the head. A tendency for the vertical 
 meridian of the eye to lean away from the median 
 plane is called plus cyclophoria. A tendency in 
 the opposite direction is called minus cyclophoria. 
 
 Pseudo-heterophoria. — In a case of uncorrected 
 ametropia there is frequently an apparent hetero- 
 phoria which disappears when the appropriate 
 correcting glasses are worn. The term hetero- 
 phoria should be reserved for cases in which the 
 
HETEROPHORIA \6j 
 
 anomaly persists after optical correction of any 
 refractive error which may be present. 
 
 If the patient be ametropic, he should wear an 
 exact correction of his ametropia during the ex- 
 amination. But this spurious heterophoria does 
 not always disappear immediately on correcting 
 the refractive error. So that, if the latter be con- 
 siderable, one should not immediately conclude 
 that any heterophoria which may be found is 
 genuine. The results should be checked by a 
 second examination after glasses correcting the 
 refractive error have been worn for several weeks. 
 
 The symptoms of heterophoria are those of 
 " eye-strain " in general — frontal headache coming 
 on towards the end of the day ; pain in the eyes 
 after watching anything intently, e.g., a play ; mi- 
 graine ; dizziness (especially associated with hy- 
 perphoria) ; conjunctival hyperemia, &c. In the 
 higher degrees of heterophoria momentary de- 
 viation with diplopia is not uncommon. 
 
 Asthenopic symptoms, which do not yield to 
 accurate optical correction of any refractive error 
 which may be present, should always lead to 
 investigation of the motor balance of the eyes, if 
 this has not already taken place. 
 
 People vary greatly in their susceptibility to 
 suffering as the result of heterophoria, just as 
 they do in the case of refractive error. Other 
 things being equal, hyperphoria is the form of 
 heterophoria which is most likely to cause trouble, 
 
l68 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 and esophoria the least. It is not uncommon to 
 see a patient who has several degrees of eso- 
 phoria, and who is quite unconscious of any defect ; 
 whereas few men can support a hyperphoria of 
 more than one degree without inconvenience. 
 
 The importance of a case of heterophoria is 
 proportionate to the trouble which it causes. A 
 case which gives rise to no symptoms requires no 
 treatment. 
 
 Heterotropia. — A person whose fusion sense 
 has developed perfectly, but who has a very high 
 degree of heterophoria, will be able (with more 
 or less suffering) to keep this deviation-tendency 
 in check during the adaptable and vigorous 
 period of childhood and youth, but, when he 
 exchanges school life for some more trying and 
 less healthy occupation, he may find himself 
 unable to continue the struggle, in which event 
 his heterophoria gives rise to an actual deviation. 
 He then loses his asthenopic symptoms, but he 
 suffers from diplopia, which is usually so annoy- 
 ing that he is glad to shade or close one eye. 
 The degree of the manifest deviation increases 
 during the first few weeks or months, after which 
 it becomes stationary. The term heterotropia 
 should be reserved for this rather rare condition, 
 as it is obviously a further stage of heterophoria, 
 and not a true squint nor a paralysis. The case 
 of Mr. S. H., page 195, is a typical example. 
 Hi e methods 0/ testing the muscular balance 
 
HETEROPHORIA 
 
 169 
 
 of the eyes. — In a case of heterophoria, under 
 ordinary circumstances, the desire for binocular 
 vision prevents the eyes from deviating from 
 their normal relative directions. But if, by 
 artificial means, the image formed in one eye 
 be so altered in appearance or position as to 
 make fusion with the other unaltered image im- 
 possible, the control of the fusion-sense is sus- 
 pended. The heterophoria then gives rise to a 
 manifest deviation. The altered image in the 
 
 deviating eye is not suppressed as in a case of 
 squint. The diplopia, therefore, gives an easy 
 means of ascertaining the direction and degree 
 of the deviation. This is the principle on which 
 all subjective tests for heterophoria are based. 
 
 The instruments required for the tests which 
 I am about to describe are the Maddox rod and 
 tangent scale, the Maddox double prism, an 
 adjustable trial frame, test cards, and a set of 
 prisms whose axes are accurately marked. A 
 rotary prism also is very useful. 
 
I JO HETEROPHORIA 
 
 The Maddox rod (fig. 1 9). A transparent round 
 glass rod is, in effect, a very strong cylindrical lens. 
 Rays of light, therefore, which pass through it 
 are dispersed in one plane only, at right angles to 
 the axis of the rod. So that if a point of light be 
 looked at through this rod, it will appear as a long- 
 narrow band of light. For the sake of convenience, 
 half a dozen of these pieces of glass rod are fixed, 
 side by side, in a metal disc of such a size as to 
 fit into an ordinary trial frame. The rods are 
 generally made of red glass, to increase the con- 
 trast between this band of light and the true 
 image. An equally good plan is to have the 
 rods made of colourless glass and to put a plane 
 red glass before the other eye. 
 
 In looking at a flame, with the rod before one 
 eye and the other eye naked, the naked eye will of 
 course see the flame and the surrounding objects ; 
 but, to the rod-clad eye, the flame will appear as 
 a long streak of light, and less luminous objects 
 will not be visible at all. It is not possible to 
 blend two such dissimilar images as the Maine and 
 the streak, 1 so the function of fusion is temporarily 
 
 1 The images should be differently coloured. The rods 
 should be carefully fitted side by side, so that it is not 
 possible to see between them. The source of light at the 
 zero of the scale should, if possible, be a frosted incan- 
 descent electric lamp. Failing this, any bright flame, 
 enclosed in a tin chimney having a hole of about i£ inch 
 diameter in one side of it, will serve the purpose. The 
 room should not be too brightly illuminated. As the rods 
 
HETEROPHORIA 
 
 171 
 
 suspended, and the eyes are merely controlled by 
 their motor coordinations. If there be no motor 
 anomaly, the streak, seen by the rod-clad eye, 
 will appear to pass through the flame, seen by the 
 
 < . - 
 
 \ 
 3 
 
 J 
 
 l a 1 1 2 2 
 
 9-8-7-6-J-V3*i'1-i-l-a'3«V-l*6-7-8-SI-'o 
 
 Fig. 20 
 
 naked eye. But if there be any heterophoria it 
 will now be able to cause the eyes to deviate, the 
 relative positions of the streak and light indicating 
 the direction and degree of the deviation. 
 
 produce extreme distortion in one direction only, a well 
 marked vertical line can be seen through the rods when 
 their axes are horizontal, and a horizontal line can be seen 
 when their axes are vertical. Care should therefore be 
 taken that there be no prominent horizontal or vertical lines 
 near the centre of the field of vision. F'or this reason, the 
 paper on which the tangent scale is printed should be of 
 nearly the same colour as the background on which it is 
 hung : or the large figures may be marked on the wall 
 itself. With these precautions, I have always found the 
 rod test quite reliable. 
 
172 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 The tangent scale is shown in fig. 20. The 
 large figures on the horizontal and vertical scales 
 denote tangents to degrees at a distance of 5 
 metres. A small electric or other light is placed 
 at the zero of the scale. 
 
 Fig. 21. 
 
 The Maddox double prism (fig. 21) consists of 
 two prisms, each of 4 , 1 cemented base to base. 
 When this double prism is placed with its apices 
 vertical, before one eye, so that the line of junc- 
 tion of the bases crosses the pupil horizontally, 
 
 1 To avoid confusion, the strength of a prism is always, 
 in this book, denoted by the number of degrees which it 
 deflects a ray of light. Chromatic dispersion produces 110 
 appreciable error in the weak prisms used in ophthalmology. 
 
 An optician usually numbers a prism according to the 
 widtli of its geometrical angle (the angle between the two 
 plane surfaces). The refracting power of such a prism 
 varies according to the kind of glass of which it is made. 
 For practical purposes it may be taken as half the geo- 
 metrical angle. For instance, a prism which deflects .1 raj 
 of light to the extent of 4 will have a geometrical angle 
 of about 8°. 
 
HETEROPHORIA I J$ 
 
 two false images of any small object will be seen, 
 one above and the other below its true position. 
 If now the other (naked) eye be opened, it will 
 see the real image of the object mid-way between 
 the two false images. The false images are not 
 changed in appearance, but the vertical displace- 
 ment of each is too great to admit of the true 
 imaoe beino- blended with either of them. The 
 eyes are thus temporarily deprived of the control 
 of the fusion sense and abandoned to their motor 
 coordinations, just as in the last test. 
 
 In looking at a horizontal line, the true image 
 can of course not be made to approach either of 
 the two false images ; but care must be taken that 
 there be no long vertical line near the centre of 
 the field of vision. 
 
 The test cards which I use consist of two pieces 
 of strong white cardboard each 2 feet square. 
 Number I. card has in its centre a straight black 
 line 2 inches long. In the centre of Number II. 
 card are ten letters of " Pearl " type having a 
 large capital O in the middle. The cards are 
 meant for use at the reading distance. The 
 reason for making them so large is that the 
 objects shall be seen in the centre of a blank 
 field with no edges near to solicit fusion. 
 
 In the examination I begin with the Maddox 
 rod. The patient is seated before the tangent 
 scale, at a distance of 5 metres from it. If he be 
 not absolutely emmetropic, he wears correcting 
 
1/4 IIKTEROPHORIA 
 
 Number I. test card. 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 Nu in lu-r II. test card. 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
HETEROPHORIA 1 75 
 
 lenses in the trial frame in every test. The frame 
 is adjusted so that the lenses are accurately centred 
 for distant vision. The rod, with its axis horizon- 
 tal, is put in the frame before the right eye. The 
 light, at the zero of the tangent scale, is switched 
 on. If the vertical streak, seen by the right eye, 
 appears to go through the light, seen by the left 
 eye, the patient has no esophoria or exophoria in 
 distant vision. Now rotate the rod so that its 
 
 Fig. 24. 1 
 
 axis is vertical. If the horizontal streak, now seen 
 by the right eye, appears to pass through the light 
 seen by the left eye, the patient has no hyper- 
 phoria in distant vision. 
 
 Now remove the rod and replace it with the 
 double prism, with apices vertical (line of junction 
 of bases horizontal). Adjust the trial frame for 
 near vision. Let the patient hold in his hand 
 Number I. test card, with the line horizontal. 
 
 1 This and the two succeeding figures are taken from 
 a paper on " Insufficiency of the Obliques," by Dr. Savage, 
 of Nashville, U.S.A., "Archives of Ophthalmology," Janu- 
 ary, 1S91. "Ophthalmic Myology," by the same author, 
 contains the fullest account of cyclophoria which has 
 hitherto been published. 
 
1 j6 IIETEROPHORIA 
 
 He will see two false images of the horizontal 
 line with the prism-clad eye, and between them, 
 he will see the true image with the naked eye. 
 If the middle line appears equidistant from each 
 of the other lines, and has its ends level with their 
 ends (fig. 24) there is no hyperphoria, esophoria, 
 or exophoria in near vision. If the middle line 
 appears parallel to the other two lines, as in 
 this figure, there is no cyclophoria. The patient's 
 oculo -motor equilibrium, therefore, is perfect in 
 every respect. 
 
 If, however, any anomaly be found during these 
 proceedings, further examinations will be required. 
 
 In the distant vision test with the Maddox rod, 
 axis horizontal, before the right eye, if the vertical 
 streak lies to the right of the light (homonymous 
 diplopia), there is esophoria. If it lies to the 
 left of the light (crossed diplopia), there is exo- 
 phoria. The figure on the tangent scale, through 
 which the vertical streak passes, numerates the 
 degree of the defect. As a control test, change 
 the rod from the right eye to the left. The posi- 
 tion of the streak also changes over, that is, it 
 still shows the same kind of diplopia. The 
 degree of heterophoria indicated is the same as 
 before. Now place before one eye a prism of 
 the same degree as the defect, base out in eso- 
 phoria, base in in exophoria. This should cause 
 the streak to pass through the light. 
 
 In using the rod, axis vertical, before the right 
 
HETEROPHORIA \JJ 
 
 eye, if the horizontal streak is seen below the light, 
 this indicates that the right eye tends to turn 
 upwards relatively to the left eye (right hyper- 
 phoria). If the streak is seen above the light, 
 the left eye tends to turn upwards relatively to 
 the right eye (left hyperphoria). The figure, on 
 the vertical scale, which the streak appears to 
 cross, numerates the degree of the hyperphoria. 
 Now change the rod from the right to the left 
 eye. Almost invariably, if the right eye saw the 
 streak above the light, the left eye will now see it 
 below, and vice versa. That is to say, the hyper- 
 phoria is comitant. The result should be checked 
 by neutralising the hyperphoria with a prism of 
 the strength indicated by the position of the 
 streak. 
 
 In rather rare instances it happens that each 
 eye, in turn, rotates upwards behind the rod 
 (double hyperphoria). 
 
 In the near vision test with the double prism 
 before the right eye, and the Number I. test card, 
 the middle line, seen by the left eye, should be 
 equidistant between the two false images, seen by 
 the right eye. If it lies nearer the upper false 
 image, there is right hyperphoria. If it lies 
 nearer the lower false image, there is left hyper- 
 phoria. The prism, base down, before the hyper- 
 phoria eye, which places the line half-way between 
 the two false images, will serve to measure the 
 degree of the anomalv. 
 
i ;8 
 
 IIKTEROPHORIA 
 
 If the three lines are not all level with each 
 other at the ends, hand the patient Number II. 
 test card and tell him to read the letters on it. 
 The small letters are to ensure a normal effort 
 of accommodation. If presbyopic, the patient is 
 allowed glasses. He will see the true image of 
 the object between its two false images. In ortho- 
 phoria the three images will be in the same 
 vertical line. If the middle image, seen by the 
 left eye, is to the left of the two false images, the 
 
 patient has esophoria in near vision. If it is to 
 the right, he has exophoria in near vision. The 
 prism, axis horizontal, which will bring the three 
 O's in line, is a measure of the defect. In near 
 vision it is better to measure with prisms than to 
 use any kind of small tangent scale, because with 
 the former the distance from the eye is of no 
 consequence, whereas with the latter the smallest 
 
HETEROPHORIA 179 
 
 variation introduces an error. The study of eso- 
 phoria and exophoria in near vision is intimately 
 associated with that of convergence anomalies. 
 
 When the patient looks at the horizontal line 
 on Number I. card, with both eyes open and the 
 double prism before the right eye, the three lines 
 should be parallel (fig. 24). If not, there is cyclo- 
 phoria. Suppose the middle line, seen by the 
 left eye, seems to dip down to the left as in fig. 25, 
 this shows that the vertical meridians of the eyes 
 are leaning in the opposite direction, towards each 
 other (minus cyclophoria). If the middle line, 
 seen by the left eye, appears to dip down to the 
 right as in fig 26, there is plus cyclophoria. 
 
 Prism duction should always be investigated in 
 any case in which heterophoria has been found. 
 
 Seat the patient at a distance of five or six 
 metres from a candle flame. Let him wear a trial 
 frame. While he looks steadily at the light, put 
 a i° prism, apex up, before the right eye. Grad- 
 ually increase the strength of the prism, until the 
 highest prism is found which the patient can bear 
 without seeing double. This indicates the extreme 
 range of superduction of the right eye. Now test 
 the superduction of the left eye. The subduction 
 of each eye is similarly tested, with prisms apex 
 down. The power of binocular abduction is 
 tested with prisms apex out. Binocular adduction 
 is so intimately associated with accommodation 
 that an attempt to measure it with prisms (which 
 
I So HETEROPHORIA 
 
 cause the eyes to converge without accommo- 
 dating) gives very variable and misleading results. 
 The normal limits of prism duction are as 
 follows : — - 
 
 Superduction ... ... i^-° to i\° 
 
 Subduction i|° to 2J- 
 
 Abduction ... ... 4 to 5 
 
 No amount of practice appears to increase the 
 duction power in these three directions. Con- 
 vergence, on the other hand, can nearly always 
 
 Fig. 27. 
 
 be much increased by practice. As the degree 
 of prism-duction does not vary from time to time, 
 and is independent of voluntary effort on the part 
 of the patient, the information obtained is reliable. 
 A rotary prism, (fig. 27) is very convenient for 
 measuring duction. It consists of two prisms of 
 equal strength, mounted in a metal disc in such a 
 position that the apex of each coincides with the 
 base of the other. In this position they, of course, 
 neutralise each other. By a mechanical arrange- 
 
HETEROPHORIA 
 
 181 
 
 ment, the two prisms can be rotated in opposite 
 directions at equal rates. The strength of the 
 compound prism can be thus gradually increased 
 from zero up to the combined strength of the two 
 components. 
 
 Fig. zi 
 
 Phorometer. — Fig. 28 shows an instrument which I 
 have found very useful for measuring heterophoria. A 
 rod-shaped wooden box 24 inches by 2 inches by 2 inches, 
 is supported on a stand by a horizontal bolt, so that it 
 is free to rotate in a vertical plane. (A two-foot length 
 
 13 
 
1 82 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 of brass optical tube would do as well as the rod- 
 shaped box). In the face of this rod-shaped box are 
 three openings, each 3 inches by -§ inch. In the centre 
 opening is fitted a piece of frosted red glass. 1 In each 
 of the two other openings is a piece of frosted green 
 glass. In the box, behind each glass, is a small electric 
 lamp having a tin reflector behind it to increase the 
 illumination. The box is ventilated by holes in the 
 back. On the back of the stand is a brass protractor, 
 marked in degrees, to show the axis at which the rod- 
 shaped box is placed. 
 
 The room is partially darkened by drawing down 
 the blinds. The patient is seated in front of the 
 instrument at a distance of about 8 or 10 feet. In a 
 trial-frame he wears a red glass before the right eye, 
 and a green glass before the left. With the right eye 
 he sees nothing but the centre red light ; and with the 
 left eye he sees nothing but the two green lights. 
 The angular distance between the lights is sufficiently great 
 to avoid any tendency to fuse the red light with cither of 
 the green lights, so that the eyes are perfectly dissociated. 
 First the rod-shaped box is put horizontal and the 
 patient is asked whether the three lights appear in the 
 same straight line. If they do, he has no hyperphoria. 
 If the red appears below the level of the green lights, 
 he has right hyperphoria. If it appears above, he has 
 left hyperphoria. The degree of the defect is measured 
 by putting a rotary prism (fig. 27) in the trial-frame 
 and screwing it up until the lights appear in line. 
 Esophoria and exophoria are similarly detected and 
 measured by placing the rod-shaped box vertical — red 
 to the right indicating esophoria, and red to the left, 
 exophoria. 
 
 1 I believe that Mr. Lang was the first to use Snellen's 
 coloured glasses for the measurement of heterophoria. His 
 apparatus is described in " The Methodical Examination 
 of the Eye," page 52. 
 
HETEROPHORIA I»3 
 
 If one wishes to ascertain the direction of a com- 
 pound defect, such, for instance, as esophoria with 
 right hyperphoria, the box is rotated until the lights 
 are in the same straight line, though of course not 
 equidistant from each other. The axis is then read off 
 from the protractor at the back of the stand. To 
 ascertain the degree of the compound defect, place the 
 box with its axis at right angles to this, then screw up 
 the rotary prism until the lights are again in the same 
 straight line. 
 
 Esophoria. 
 
 The liability of an esophoria to cause trouble is 
 determined not so much by its degree as by the 
 condition of the functions of abversion and binocu 
 lar abduction. A patient who can abvert each 
 eye separately until the cornea touches the outer 
 canthus, and whose binocular abduction is not 
 less than 3 , will as a rule be able to support 
 many degrees of esophoria without inconvenience. 
 
 In many cases of esophoria of high degree 
 there is occasional momentary diplopia. When 
 the patient is gazing vacantly without perceiving 
 what is before his eyes, perhaps the visual axes 
 may deviate. Instantly the diplopia awakens the 
 dormant fusion sense, and the eyes immediately 
 recover themselves. These cases are often mis- 
 taken for occasional convergent squint. Occa- 
 sional squints, however, differ from esophoria in 
 that the fusion sense is defective, so that the 
 deviation is not so instantly corrected, and diplopia 
 is either absent or very faint. In an occasional 
 
184 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 squint, too, examination with the Maddox rod 
 shows that when the deviation is not actually 
 present there is little or no tendency to con- 
 vergence. In a case of occasional squint, we 
 have a pair of eyes, not properly controlled by 
 the fusion sense, responding- to intermittent and 
 varying nervous impulses. In esophoria there is 
 a constant and definite motor anomaly which is 
 kept in check by a perfect fusion faculty. 
 
 Treatment. — Moderate degrees of esophoria 
 never cause inconvenience unless the binocular 
 abduction is very deficient. In these cases the 
 symptoms are relieved by the constant wearing 
 of prisms, apex in, which represent the deficiency 
 of binocular abduction [not the degree of eso- 
 phoria). The prism should be divided between 
 the two eyes. For example, a patient with 5 of 
 esophoria will probably not be inconvenienced 
 thereby. But if his binocular abduction is only 
 2 instead of 4 he is likely to suffer from " asthe- 
 nopic " symptoms and occasional diplopia. He 
 will be relieved by wearing prisms, apex in, 
 having a total deviating power of 2 . If the 
 patient already wears glasses for correction of a 
 focal error, the prismatic effect may perhaps be 
 got by decentration of lenses (see Appendix). 
 
 In a case of esophoria of high degree requiring 
 treatment, operation is the only resort. If the 
 esophoria is not less then 7 in distant vision, 
 and the near vision test shows the same or a 
 
HETEROPHORIA 185 
 
 higher degree, and if abversion and binocular 
 abduction are not markedly below normal, the 
 best procedure is complete central tenotomy of 
 an internal rectus, by the method described on 
 p. 216. If the degree of esophoria is less in 
 near vision than in distant vision, tenotomy is 
 contra-indicated. In a case of esophoria of high 
 degree, with abduction less than 2°, and abver- 
 sion subnormal, and frequent momentary diplopia, 
 advancement of an external rectus should be 
 performed. 
 
 Exophoria. 
 
 Uncomplicated exophoria of moderate degree 
 seldom causes any inconvenience. But if, as 
 occasionally happens, there is a defect of dynamic 
 convergence in addition, the patient is likely to 
 suffer from frontal headache, not only after using 
 the eyes in near vision, but often at other times 
 also. In cases of exophoria of high degree the 
 eyes may momentarily deviate, but this is less 
 common than in esophoria. 
 
 Treatment. — Prisms are seldom of use in exo- 
 phoria. Slight cases require no treatment, if 
 uncomplicated. If the case be complicated by 
 convergence deficiency, treatment should be 
 directed to this anomaly. Even if there be no 
 deficiency of dynamic convergence, convergence 
 training often relieves the patient's symptoms, 
 but, in my experience, the effect has been only 
 
jS6 heterophoria 
 
 transitory. In higher degrees of exophoria, espe- 
 cially if adversion be deficient, the internal rectus 
 muscle should be advanced. One should then 
 aim at producing an operative effect exactly equal 
 to the degree of the exophoria of distant vision, 
 Exophoria is almost invariably due to under- 
 action of the internal recti, scarcely ever to over- 
 action of the externi. For this reason, tenotomy 
 of the rectus externus is not advisable. 
 
 Hyperphoria. 
 
 Clinically, hyperphoria is the most important of 
 all forms of heterophoria, because of the severity 
 of the symptoms to which it is liable to give rise, 
 and the certainty with which these symptoms may 
 be relieved. The liability of a case to cause 
 trouble depends not only upon the degree of the 
 hyperphoria, but upon the extent of any deficiency 
 of prism-duction in the opposite direction. For 
 instance, an ordinary healthy man who has |° of 
 rio-ht hyperphoria will probably suffer no incon- 
 venience if the right subduction is as much as 2°: 
 but if it is only i° or less, he is almost certain to 
 have trouble. 
 
 The commonest symptom is frontal headache, 
 coming on towards the end of the day, not espe- 
 cially caused by near work. Some patients com- 
 plain of giddiness on looking down. Momentary 
 diplopia is not uncommon. 
 
 In a marked case of hyperphoria, more often 
 
HETEROPHORIA 1 87 
 
 than not, the palpebral fissure on the hyper- 
 phoria side is smaller than that on the other. 
 This asymmetry disappears entirely when the 
 hyperphoria is corrected. 
 
 The treatment, in any case of hyperphoria of 
 moderate degree, is by prisms to be worn con- 
 stantly. The prism should be placed, apex up, 
 before the hyperphoric eye. Or, if more than i° 
 is required, the effect may be divided between the 
 two eyes, the prism before the other eye being 
 placed, of course, apex down. The strength of 
 the prisms should be determined partly by the 
 degree of the hyperphoria and partly by the 
 range of prism duction (see page 179). One 
 should attempt as nearly as possible to correct 
 the hyperphoria and to bring each eye into the 
 middle of the vertical range of prism duction. 
 For example, take a case of right hyperphoria 2 , 
 in which the right superduction (and left subduc- 
 tion) is 3 and the right subduction (and left 
 superduction) is i°. A prism, apex up, before 
 the right eye, 2 would correct the hyperphoria : 
 but a prism of i° would suffice to bring the eye 
 into the middle of the range of prism duction. 
 In this case one would order a prism of il- as a 
 compromise. 
 
 If the hyperphoria is very high — over 4 — 
 operation is usually indicated. If subduction of 
 the hyperphoric eye is not less than i°, and super- 
 duction over 4 , complete central tenotomy of the 
 
1 88 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 superior rectus of this eye is the best procedure. 
 In a case of hyperphoria of very high degree, 
 with very deficient subduction, the inferior 
 rectus muscle of the hyperphoric eye should be 
 advanced. 
 
 I have seen a few well-marked cases of so-called 
 double hyperphoria. In all there was more or less 
 drooping of both eyelids. A great effort was 
 required to open the eyes widely while looking 
 straight ahead, but in looking up, the lids were 
 lifted normally. Either eye turned up when 
 screened. Subduction of either eye was normal. 
 These cases were possibly due to a faulty nervous 
 connection between the superior recti muscles and 
 the levatores palpebral superiores. In two of these 
 cases I performed complete central tenotomy of 
 both superior recti, with excellent results. 
 
 I have seen several cases of double hyper- 
 phoria associated with plus cyclophoria — due 
 probably to underaction of the superior oblique 
 muscles. 
 
 I have no note of any case of double kata- 
 phoria (downward tendency of each eye). 
 
 Cyc/ophoria. 
 
 In order that binocular vision may be possible 
 it is necessary not only that the visual axes of the 
 two eyes shall be directed to the same object, but 
 that their vertical diameters shall be parallel. 
 The work of keeping the vertical diameters 
 
HETEROPHORIA 1 89 
 
 parallel falls almost entirely upon the oblique 
 muscles. If the superior obliques act too feebly, 
 the eyes tend to rotate round a fore-and-aft axis 
 so that their vertical diameters diverge above 
 (plus cyclophoria.) This is very much more 
 common than minus cyclophoria. Plus cyclo- 
 phoria is not infrequently associated with double 
 hyperphoria. 
 
 Cyclophoria may cause nausea, vertigo, and 
 difficulty in judging the true position of the steps 
 in going downstairs. 
 
 Not much can be done in the way of direct 
 treatment in cases of cyclophoria. But there 
 are some practical points which deserve careful 
 study. 
 
 Close one eye, and hold before the other a 
 strong convex cylindrical lens, axis vertical. Look 
 at a horizontal line, the junction of a floor and 
 ceiling, for instance. The horizontal line still 
 appears horizontal. Now rotate the lens a few 
 degrees. The horizontal line appears to rotate 
 slightly with the lens. In other words, the cylin- 
 drical lens rotates the image of the line towards 
 its meridian of greatest convexity. 
 
 Next put on a trial-frame and place before 
 each eye a + i d. cylindrical lens, axis vertical. 
 Vision will be slightly blurred, but objects will not 
 appear displaced, and the lenses can be worn for 
 a long time without discomfort. Now rotate each 
 lens about 30 , so that their axes diverge above. 
 
190 
 
 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 On looking down, the floor seems far away, and, 
 on looking up, the ceiling seems quite near — one 
 feels about 7 feet high. Now rotate the cylinders 
 in the opposite direction, so that their axes con- 
 verge above. The floor appears quite near, and 
 the ceiling high — one feels a dwarf. After a few 
 minutes of this artificial oblique astigmatism, one 
 experiences a feeling of giddiness and nausea, 
 reminiscent of the "giant stride" in one's early 
 school days. 
 
 In the light of the former experiment, the 
 explanation is plain. We are accustomed to 
 localise all objects with reference to the horizontal 
 surface (floor, ground, or sea) which supports us. 
 While wearing the convex cylinders with axes 
 divergent above, the images of the horizontal 
 surface of the floor are tilted outwards towards 
 each temple. In order that these images may be 
 received upon corresponding points of the two 
 retinae, each eye must rotate about a fore-and-aft 
 axis so that the vertical diameters diverge above. 
 This is accomplished by a lessened action of the 
 superior oblique muscles and an increased action 
 of the inferior obliques. But this has also the 
 effect of rotating the two eyes a little upwards. 
 So that, in looking down to the floor, one has to 
 put forth sufficient energy to overcome this up- 
 ward tendency, as well as to effect the actual 
 downward rotation. And in looking at the 
 ceiling, less than the normal expenditure of energy 
 
HETEROPHORIA I 9 I 
 
 is required, owing to the eyes already having an 
 upward tendency. We depend chiefiy upon the 
 " muscular sense " of the external ocular muscles 
 in judging the relative positions of objects. 
 Therefore, the increased effort required in look- 
 ing down, makes the floor appear farther away, 
 and the lessened effort in looking up, makes the 
 ceiling appear lower. 
 
 In the experiment with the axes of the cylinders 
 convergent above, the conditions are exactly 
 reversed. 
 
 This experiment appears to explain the com- 
 monly observed fact that astigmatism is more 
 liable to cause trouble when the axes are oblique 
 than when they are vertical or horizontal. Un- 
 corrected astigmatism, unless the axes in the two 
 eyes are parallel or at right angles, must cause a 
 pseudo-cyclophoria, which should disappear when 
 the astigmatism is corrected. 
 
 Now and then one meets with a patient, with 
 oblique astigmatism who is less comfortable with 
 glasses which accurately correct his refractive 
 error than he was without any correction at all. 
 In such a case, one generally finds that he has 
 cyclophoria of an opposite kind to the pseudo- 
 cyclophoria which would be produced by his un- 
 corrected astigmatism. So that they, to a certain 
 extent, neutralised each other. But, with the 
 correction of his astigmatism, the whole of his 
 true cyclophoria becomes manifest. A slight 
 
192 
 
 HKTEROPIIORIA 
 
 rotation, say about 5 , of both his cylinders, in the 
 direction which favours the feebly-acting pair of 
 oblique muscles, will often make him quite com- 
 fortable without appreciably lowering his visual 
 acuity. 
 
 Under certain conditions it is possible, without any 
 rotation of the eyes round a fore and aft axis, to blend 
 images of lines whicli are slightly tilted in opposite 
 directions (see page 11). Some authors have therefore 
 assumed that the eyes never make an axial rotation in 
 the interests of binocular vision. This view does not 
 accord with clinical and experimental evidence. Fu- 
 sion of tilted images takes place according to the law 
 stated on page 1 1 . 
 
 Rhythmic exercises with prisms, cylinders, &c, 
 are employed by many eminent ophthalmologists 
 in America. 1 have thoroughly tried all the most 
 approved methods, but have never been able 
 to satisfy myself that I have produced any effect 
 in any case of esophoria or hyperphoria. Cases 
 of exophoria are indirectly benefited by exer- 
 cising the dynamic convergence, but that is a 
 different matter. 
 
 In America there is, no doubt, a tendency to 
 overestimate the importance of small latent devia- 
 tion tendencies. But this is less harmful than 
 the almost total neglect which the subject meets 
 with in this country. 
 
 Here are some examples : — 
 
 Mr. R. H. t aged 38, a hard worker, and head of <i 
 large city business, consulted me on October 17, 1899. 
 
HETEROPHORIA 
 
 93 
 
 He complained of dull, aching pains in the eyes and 
 forehead. Pain was always relieved by sleep. It was 
 not especially associated with near work. He suffered 
 almost as much during his holidays. His eyes had 
 been examined many times, and he had worn glasses 
 for twelve years. There was a slight drooping of the 
 left upper lid. He was wearing + 2-25 D. sph. each 
 eye. He showed me several prescriptions for glasses, 
 all practically the same. Retinoscopy without my- 
 driatic showed 2 D. of hypermetropia each eye, no 
 astigmatism. His corrected vision was £ easily, each 
 eye. On investigating the motor balance of his eyes, 
 I found he had nearly 2 left hyperphoria. Left 
 superduction and right subduction were each 4 ; and 
 left subduction and right superduction were each i°. 
 I ordered spectacles + 2 D. sph. each eye, the right 
 lens to be combined with a f° prism, apex down, and 
 the left lens with a similar prism, apex up. 
 
 On September 26, 1902, three years later, I saw the 
 patient again. He has worn the glasses constantly, 
 with perfect comfort, and is entirely free from the old 
 trouble. 
 
 Miss E. B., aged 33, seen with Mr. Devereux Mar- 
 shall on February 6, 1903. Patient had suffered from 
 frontal headache and occasional diplopia for as long as 
 she could remember. Headaches were always relieved 
 by sleep, were independent of occupation, and became 
 more severe towards the end of the day. She had for 
 many years worn an exact correction of her ametropia 
 (4- 075 D. cyl. ax. vert, each eye), but the glasses gave 
 her no relief. 
 
 On investigating the motor balance of the eyes we 
 found left hyperphoria 4 , exophoria i°. Right super- 
 duction and left subduction barely i°. Right sub- 
 duction and left superduction each 6°. We ordered, for 
 constant wear, to be incorporated with her cylinders, 
 R. E. prisms i^-°, apex down, L. E. prism i^°, apex up. 
 
194 
 
 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 The patient has been seen twice since that date. 
 She is perfectly comfortable and entirely free from 
 headaches. 
 
 Miss F. L., aged 17, was brought to me on February 2, 
 1900. She was wearing spectacles + 1 D. sph. She 
 said that when she was tired her eyes would often be 
 crossed for a moment and she then would see double. 
 The crossing of the eyes only lasted an instant. She 
 had frequent frontal headaches. She had worn glasses 
 since she was ten years of age. She had been told that 
 she suffered from " periodic strabismus." Retinoscopy 
 without mydriatic showed hypermetropia of 0-5 D. 
 only. Vision of each eye f. Examination with the 
 Maddox rod and tangent scale showed esophoria, 9 , 
 in distant vision. Esophoria, in near vision, was 8°. 
 Binocular prism abduction was only 2 . R. E. could 
 be abverted until the cornea touched the outer canthus. 
 L. E. abversion not quite so complete. The fusion 
 faculty was perfect. The case was not one of " periodic 
 strabismus" at all, but an example of esophoria of 
 high degree. 
 
 February 5, 1900. — Retinoscopy was confirmed under 
 atropine. 
 
 February 20, 1900. — I advanced the left external 
 rectus muscle (of course without tenotomising the 
 internus). 
 
 February 27, 1900. — Stitches removed. 
 
 March 29, 1900. — Patient has t° esophoria in distant 
 vision, perfect orthophoria in near vision, binocular 
 prism abduction 5 . Patient never has diplopia 
 now. 
 
 June 18, 1902. — Patient has not been seen to cross 
 her eyes since the operation, and she has had no 
 diplopia. She is quite free from headaches now. She 
 has, of course, not worn glasses since the operation. 
 
 Captain P., aged about 30, consulted me on July 11, 
 1899. He had always suffered a good deal from head- 
 
HETEROPHORIA 
 
 195 
 
 aches, and had had occasional momentary diplopia, 
 but had never been told that he squinted. Both the 
 headaches and the diplopia had been more frequent 
 since he had "fever" in India four years previously. 
 He had had his eyes examined several times, and 
 had once been ordered reading glasses, but they had 
 done no good. 
 
 Retinoscopy showed that he had no notable refrac- 
 tive error. On examining the motor balance of his 
 eyes, he was found to have left hyperphoria 2^°. His 
 right superduction and left superduction were each 
 scarcely i°. His right subduction and left superduc- 
 tion were each 5 . Excursions of each eye separately 
 were quite full. 
 
 August 3, 1899. — On repeating the examination, I 
 got precisely the same results. As there was no refrac- 
 tive error which would necessitate glasses, I did not 
 wish to burden him with prisms, I therefore advised 
 operation. 
 
 August 14, 1899. — I performed complete central 
 tenotomy of the left superior rectus, after the method 
 described on page 216. The after treatment consisted 
 only of a shell and a pad of gauze worn over the L. E. 
 for a few days, and bathing with boric lotion. 
 
 August 29, 1899. — Wound healed and eyes perfectly 
 comfortable. There is now right hyperphoria of less 
 than i°. 
 
 July 11, 1902. — Patient has been free from head- 
 aches and the occasional diplopia since the operation. 
 There is now no measureable degree of heterophoria. 
 The streak of light with the rod before the R. E. is 
 at the upper part of the flame, showing left hyperphoria 
 of less than £°. 
 
 Mr. S. H. — I saw quite recently an exceedingly 
 instructive case, a gentleman aged 20, sent me by Dr. 
 Bolton Tomson. From early childhood until one 
 year ago, the patient had suffered from severe head- 
 
196 
 
 HETEROPHORIA 
 
 aches coming on towards the end of the day. He had 
 occasional diplopia, one image being over the other. 
 He also had frequent attacks of typical migraine. 
 During the last year, he has seen double constantly, 
 and the right eye has squinted downwards. He can 
 still, by a great effort, overcome the deviation and 
 blend the images. The diplopia is so intense that he 
 is only comfortable when one or other eye is covered. 
 But since the hyperphoria gave place to an actual 
 deviation, the headaches and migraine have completely 
 disappeared. 
 
 There is no important refractive error. R. E. deviates 
 downwards (or L. E. upwards) 8°. Either eye deviates 
 outwards 5 . Prisms of this strength give binocular 
 vision with orthophoria. 
 
 I propose to advance the L. inferior rectus muscle, 
 which I have no doubt will result in cure of the whole 
 trouble. If this operation had been performed many 
 years ago the patient would have been spared much 
 unnecessary suffering. 
 
 Insufficiency of Dynamic Convergence. 
 
 This is not a heterophoria, but it is convenient 
 to discuss it in this chapter. 
 
 There has been much confusion on the subject 
 of insufficiency of convergence, because authors 
 have not clearly distinguished between static and 
 dynamic convergence. 
 
 A person whose visual apparatus is normal has 
 no static convergence at any time ; in distant 
 vision he exercises no dynamic convergence ; in 
 near vision his dynamic convergence exactly 
 suffices to cause both visual axes to be directed 
 to the near object. If his dynamic convergence 
 
INSUFFICIENCY OF DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE 197 
 
 were excessive,' there would be a tendency to con- 
 vergent squint in near vision ; if it were insuf- 
 ficient, he would have difficulty in maintaining 
 convergence, as in reading, for instance, for any 
 length of time. 
 
 A person who has a convergent squint, which 
 persists after correction of any refractive error, 
 has an unchecked static convergence ; one who 
 has esophoria has a static convergence which is 
 kept in check by constant muscular effort, 1 evoked 
 by the desire for binocular vision. Static con- 
 vergence is a minus quantity in divergent squint. 
 In exophoria there is a minus static convergence 
 which is neutralised by an abnormal effort of 
 dynamic convergence. In these cases the power 
 of dynamic convergence may or may not be 
 normal. 
 
 A patient, therefore, who has exophoria in 
 distant vision and the same degree of exophoria, 
 or less, in near vision, cannot properly be said to 
 have insufficiency of convergence. This dis- 
 tinction between exophoria and insufficiency of 
 dynamic convergence is of supreme practical 
 importance, because the treatment of the two 
 affections differs entirely. In the former case, if 
 any treatment be required at all, operation is 
 usually necessary ; in the latter, operation is al- 
 
 1 This " without prejudice " to the much-debated question 
 of the existence of a cerebral centre for divergence. 
 
 H 
 
198 INSUFFICIENCY OF DYNAMIC CON VERGE NCE 
 
 ways contra-indicated, and benefit may often be 
 obtained from exercises. 
 
 Insufficiency of dynamic convergence, apart 
 from neuropathic cases, is not common. 
 
 The symptoms produced by insufficiency of 
 convergence are pain in the brow after reading, 
 and a tendency to hold the book at a long dis- 
 tance from the eyes (apart from any error of 
 static or dynamic refraction). 
 
 Convergence being a voluntary act, the extreme 
 degree of which any individual is capable will 
 vary from time to time, according- to the state of 
 his health and the amount of energy he is able to 
 put forth at the moment. Elaborate instruments 
 for determining the near point of convergence 
 are, therefore, not required. Moreover, this 
 information is not of much practical use. 
 
 The best procedure is to test the horizontal 
 motor balance of the eyes, first in distant vision. 
 and then at ten inches. If there is no more 
 exophoria, or no less esophoria, in near vision 
 than there is in distant vision, the patient has no 
 insufficiency of convergence. If the patient has 
 orthophoria in distant vision and exophoria in 
 near vision, or if there is more exophoria, or less 
 esophoria, in near than in distant vision, he has 
 insufficiency of dynamic convergence of a degree 
 equal to the difference. 
 
 In an uncomplicated case of insufficiency oi 
 convergence, exercises should be tried. The 
 
INSUFFICIENCY OF DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE 199 
 
 following procedure is as good as any : — Any 
 error of static or dynamic refraction is corrected 
 by glasses. The patient begins reading a book 
 at the ordinary distance. Then, while still read- 
 ing, he gradually brings the book nearer his eyes 
 until the print begins to be blurred. He then 
 slowly removes the book to the ordinary reading 
 distance. This is repeated. At about every 
 tenth line he looks into the distance for a moment, 
 in order to completely relax his convergence. 
 Two or three pages should be read in this way, 
 three or four times a day for a month. This 
 simple plan has given quite as good results as the 
 more elaborate methods which I have tried. This 
 is perhaps because the patient finds it more con- 
 venient to carry out, no special apparatus being 
 required. 
 
 It has been objected that the accommodation is exer- 
 cised at the same time as the convergence. I do not 
 think that it would be advisable, in young subjects at any 
 rate, entirely to dissociate dynamic convergence from 
 the effort of accommodation with which it is normally 
 always associated. But if it should seem advisable to 
 relieve the strain on the accommodation during the 
 exercises, this may be done in either of two ways — the 
 patient may wear convex glasses so as to exercise less 
 accommodation with a given amount of convergence, 
 or, what comes to the same thing, he may wear prisms, 
 apex in, so as to exercise more convergence with a given 
 amount of accommodation. 
 
 These rhythmic exercises do not increase the 
 power of the ocular muscles (any more than voice 
 
200 INSUFFICIENCY OF DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE 
 
 training increases the power of the laryngeal 
 muscles), so they do not in the least diminish 
 exophoria in distant vision. But they often much 
 improve the power of dynamic convergence, by 
 teaching the nervous apparatus to respond more 
 readily to the will. 
 
 In a case in which exercises have failed and 
 the symptoms are troublesome one may, as a 
 pis aller, order prisms, apices out, for near vision. 
 
201 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 OPERATIONS ON THE EXTERNAL OCULAR 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 The operations commonly performed on the 
 muscles of the eye are advancement and tenotomy. 
 Either of these measures may be employed alone, 
 or advancement of one muscle may be combined 
 with tenotomy of its opponent. 
 
 The indications for these operations are fully 
 discussed in previous chapters. 
 
 Advancement. 
 
 Very many different methods of advancement 
 of a rectus muscle have been described. I have 
 tried many of these repeatedly, also two methods 
 of shortening the tendon by folding it upon itself. 
 None of these has proved entirely satisfactory. 
 With practice, one can always make sure of 
 inserting the sutures firmly in the tough fibrous 
 tissue near the margin of the cornea, without 
 putting in the needle dangerously deeply. The 
 difficulty is with the end of the sutures attached 
 to the muscle. I found that two of these methods 
 of operating gave better results than the others. 
 In one operation, three or four sutures are simply 
 
202 OPERATIONS 
 
 passed through the tough circumcorueal tissue, 
 and through the muscle, and tied. If these 
 sutures hold for a week, the results are permanent. 
 But the muscle end of the suture often cuts its 
 way through in three or four days. And in any 
 case, one has to produce an over effect at the time 
 of the operation, to allow for slacking of these 
 sutures, so that precision is not attainable by this 
 method. In the other operation, the sutures are 
 knotted on the muscle, either in one or two parts. 
 This nearly always gives good immediate results, 
 but a very large proportion of the cases relapse 
 within a few weeks. This is probably due to the 
 fact that the muscle atrophies in front of the 
 ligatures, and so is only attached to the globe 
 by its lateral expansions, which subsequently 
 stretch. 
 
 I devised the following operation with the 
 object of combining the advantages and avoiding 
 the disadvantages of the two methods to which I 
 have just referred. 
 
 The Author s Advancement Operation. 
 In this operation a firm, unyielding hold is got 
 for the sutures at each end, so that any desired 
 degree of rotation of the eyeball may be produced. 
 For moderate deviations, I advance a muscle 
 without tenotomising its opponent. F"or squints 
 of very high degree, I usually first tenotomise 
 the opposing muscle to avoid refraction of the 
 
OPERATIONS 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 ?.; 
 
!04 
 
 dobe. 
 
 OPERATIONS 
 
 The anatomical relations of the advanced 
 muscle are disturbed as little as possible. As 
 the middle part of the muscle is not included 
 
 Fig. 34. 
 
 in the sutures, its main blood supply is not 
 interfered with. The immediate effect produced 
 is the final result. 
 
OPERATIONS 205 
 
 Instruments. — The ordinary advancement in- 
 struments are required : Speculum (fig. 29), 
 straight blunt-pointed scissors (fig, 34), fixation 
 forceps with projecting teeth which take a firm 
 hold of the sclerotic (fig. 36), Prince's advance- 
 ment forceps, right and left (figs. 30 and 31), or 
 the smooth probe-pointed forceps (fig. 32), needle 
 holder (fig. t,^), needles, and thread ; and if a 
 tenotomy is to be done at the same time, a 
 tenotomy hook also (fig. 35). The needles I use 
 are made for me by Messrs. Weiss and Son. 
 They are small, curved needles with large eyes. 
 They must be very sharp. The jaws of the 
 needle holder which I use (fig. ^t,), are curved 
 transversely to fit these needles. Flat jaws, how- 
 ever small, are apt to break a curved needle. 
 The advancement forceps shown in fig. 32, being 
 smooth and probe-pointed, is easier to introduce 
 than the ordinary form of Prince's. Both blades 
 being alike, only one forceps is required instead 
 of two. The spring is strong so that the smooth 
 blades show no tendency to slip under any strain 
 to which one ought to subject the tissues. 
 
 The blunt instruments are sterilised by boiling 
 for five or ten minutes in water containing a little 
 washing soda. The scissors are boiled for about 
 a minute. The eyes of new needles are cleared 
 with the point of a sewing needle. The needles 
 are then boiled for not more than a minute, before 
 being threaded. 1 used to use only new needles, 
 
206 OPERATIONS 
 
 to ensure their being as sharp as possible. I find, 
 however, that it is quite easy to sharpen them on 
 a fine oiled stone ; even new needles can be much 
 improved. They should then be kept in a flannel 
 book ; the paper in which they arc sold is apt to 
 injure delicate points. 
 
 The suture material is a very important detail. 
 It should be thick. The thin stuff sold as " eye 
 silk" cuts like a knife. I use thick black silk 
 prepared as follows : A reel of the silk is wound 
 loosely round a winder (made by bending up a 
 piece of wire). It is boiled in water, to sterilise 
 it and to remove the superfluous colouring 
 matter. It is then dried before a fire. The end 
 of the silk is then threaded through a large glass 
 bead. The glass bead is then dropped into a 
 glass beaker containing a very hot mixture of 
 white beeswax, three parts, and white vaseline, 
 five parts. The whole of the silk is drawn 
 through the boiling mixture, and is wound on 
 a large glass reel. It is kept in a sterilised 
 glass jar, always ready for use without further 
 preparation. 
 
 In preparing for the operation, a piece of the 
 silk, about a foot long, is drawn out of the jar with 
 sterilised forceps ; it is threaded through the 
 sterilised needle as far as its middle. The two 
 halves of the waxed silk are then twisted together 
 into a single cord. Two of these threaded needles 
 ;ire required. The part of the suture which meets 
 
OPERATIONS 207 
 
 with the greatest resistance in passing through 
 the tissues, is that near the eye of the needle. 
 The thread must be double here in any case, so 
 one may as well have the benefit of the double 
 thickness throughout. The wax-soaked thread is 
 sufficiently stiff, at the ordinary temperature of the 
 air, to abstain from tying itself into undesired 
 knots during the operation, but at the body tem- 
 perature it is quite supple. It glides easily and 
 with a minimum of damage to the tissues— like 
 a well greased catheter. It is practically non- 
 absorbent— an important point in a region which 
 cannot be absolutely aseptic. 
 
 Anesthesia. — For young children a general 
 anaesthetic, preferably chloroform, is necessary. 
 For older patients a local anaesthetic is sufficient. 
 I use the crystals of hydrochlorate of cocaine, 
 applied twice before the operation at intervals of 
 about five minutes. During general anaesthesia 
 the eyes usually diverge, so that one has to 
 remember the angle of the squint and produce 
 approximately the effect required. Under a local 
 anaesthetic there is no such divergence, so that 
 one can gauge exactly the extent to which the 
 muscle is to be advanced. For this reason, I 
 never operate under general anaesthesia unless I 
 can rely upon a trained fusion faculty to do the 
 fine adjustment. 
 
 The operation— -The hands of the surgeon 
 and nurses are sterilised. The patient's face is 
 
2o8 OPERATIONS 
 
 thoroughly cleansed. The conjunctival sac is 
 irrigated with sterilised saline solution (60 grains 
 to a pint of water). If the lacrymal apparatus 
 and conjunctiva are not perfectly healthy, the 
 operation is postponed until they are. Just after 
 the irrigation, and from time to time during the 
 operation, a few drops of supra-renal gland extract 
 are instilled. 1 use Parke Davis and Co.'s adre- 
 nalin chloride solution. The vascular constriction 
 caused by the extract makes the operation blood- 
 less or nearly so, so that one is not impeded in 
 one's work by the necessity for constant sponging. 
 The patient lies on the table in a good light, 
 with his feet towards the window. His lids are- 
 held open by the speculum. The surgeon, stand- 
 ing behind the patient's head, grasps the con- 
 junctiva with the toothed forceps, while, with the 
 scissors, he makes a straight vertical incision 
 through it about half an inch long. The middle 
 of the incision is close to the corneal margin. A 
 similar incision is then made through the capsule 
 of Tenon. The conjunctiva and capsule then 
 retract, or, if necessary, they are pushed back, so 
 as to expose the insertion of the tendon. If the 
 angle of the squint is of high degree, the vertical 
 incision through the membranes is made curved 
 instead of straight, the convexity of the curve 
 beim>" towards the cornea. This is to allow the 
 membranes to retract more freely. One blade of 
 the advancement forceps is now passed under the 
 
OPERATIONS 
 
 :oq 
 
 tendon, after the manner of a tenotomy hook, the 
 other blade being superficial to the conjunctiva. 
 The forceps is now closed, so that tendon, capsule 
 of Tenon, and conjunctiva are all firmly clamped 
 together, with their relations undisturbed except 
 tor the retraction of the membranes. The tendon, 
 and a few little fibrous bands beneath the tendon, 
 are now divided with scissors, at their insertion 
 into the sclerotic. The advancement forceps, 
 holding the tendon, capsule, and conjunctiva, can 
 now easily be lifted up so as to get a good view 
 of the under side of the muscle. 
 
 One of the needles is then passed inwards at 
 A, through conjunctiva, capsule, and muscle. It is 
 then again passed through muscle, capsule, and 
 conjunctiva, and brought out at B. The bight 
 of the thread thus encloses about the lower fourth 
 of the width of the muscle, together with its ten- 
 dinous expansions and capsule and conjunctiva. 
 The other needle is similarly entered at A', passed 
 through conjunctiva, capsule, and muscle, and 
 brought out at the under side of the muscle. It 
 is then entered again at the under side of the 
 muscle and brought out through the conjunctiva 
 at B', the bight of this suture thus enclosing 
 the upper fourth of the width of the muscle, &c. 
 The object of inserting both sutures, before 
 proceeding further with either, is that they may 
 be symmetrically placed. The ends of the 
 thread from A' and B' are then knotted tightly 
 
2IO 
 
 OPERATIONS 
 
 at C. The end bearing the needle is then 
 entered at D, and passed through conjunctiva, 
 capsule, and muscle, and carried beneath the 
 lower blade of the advancement forceps nearly to 
 the corneal margin. The needle is here passed 
 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 through the tough circumcorneal fibrous tissue, 
 and brought out at G'. The two ends of the 
 thread are then temporarily tied loosely, with 
 a^ single hitch, at H. The first suture is then 
 similarly completed. The anterior part of the 
 muscle and capsule and conjunctiva are then 
 
OPERATIONS 2 I I 
 
 removed, by cutting them through with scissors 
 behind where they are grasped by the advance- 
 ment forceps. The gap is then closed by tight- 
 ening and securely tying each suture at HH, so 
 that the eyeball is rotated in its correct position, 
 and the anterior end of the muscle is brought 
 nearly up to the corneal margin at GG'. 
 
 In operating under cocaine, before the knots 
 are tied at HH, an assistant holds the globe in 
 the primary position with forceps, while the 
 patient is told to try to look away from the 
 operated muscle. This relaxes the muscle while 
 it is being drawn forward by the sutures. The 
 sutures are then temporarily secured at HH, by 
 the first hitch of "the surgeon's knot." The 
 assistant then releases the globe. The fine 
 adjustment is done by tightening or loosening 
 the hitches at HH, the result being checked by 
 the mirror test or by the reflection of a candle 
 flame on the corneae. The surgeon's knots at 
 H H are then completed. 
 
 The longitudinal position, on the muscle, of the 
 loops ABC and A' B' C, varies approximately 
 according to the degree of rotation required. 
 
 In operating under cocaine, the immediate 
 effect is the permanent result. No over-correction, 
 therefore, is necessary. In operating under general 
 anaesthesia, one has to bear in mind the angle of 
 the deviation and produce approximately that 
 decree of rotation. 
 
2 I 2 OPERATIONS 
 
 After the operation, the eye is irrigated with 
 sterilised saline solution, a little boric ointment 
 smeared on the edges of the lids, and a gauze pad 
 applied. 
 
 After-treatment. — The eye is irrigated and 
 dressed every day. The more quiet the eye is 
 kept, during the first few days, the more quickly 
 will the wound heal. I prefer, therefore, to keep 
 the patient in bed, with both eyes bandaged for 
 the first four or five days. After this time his 
 unoperated eye is uncovered, and atropised to 
 prevent any effort of accommodation. His spec- 
 tacles, if he has any, are put on over his bandage. 
 It is a good plan to stick two pieces of postage 
 stamp paper on the lens before the unoperated 
 eye, so as to leave a narrow vertical slit between 
 them. If the patient looks only through the slit, 
 he can look up or down, but does not make any 
 horizontal or accommodative movements, which 
 might retard the healing of the wound. The 
 stitches are removed on the eighth day. The 
 bandage is discarded two days later. 
 
 Musculo- capsular advancement. — In many cases 
 of neuropathic divergence, and in some old cases 
 of divergence following tenotomy of an internal 
 rectus, it is advisable to bring forward the capsule 
 of Tenon and conjunctiva as well as the enfeebled 
 muscle. These membranes have little elasticity, 
 so that movement in the opposite direction will 
 be restricted. 
 
OPERATIONS 
 
 213 
 
 Seize the conjunctiva and capsule of Tenon just 
 above or below the insertion of the muscle to be 
 advanced. Snip through these membranes with 
 scissors. Introduce one blade of an advancement 
 forceps, and hook this blade under the tendon, 
 after the manner of a tenotomy hook. Close the 
 forceps. The membranes and tendon are thus 
 clamped together, so that no retraction of the 
 former is permitted. Now make the long vertical 
 incision near the corneal margin, and proceed 
 with the advancement as already described. 
 
 Secondary advancement. — Not infrequently a 
 patient presents himself with one eye widely 
 divergent as a result of tenotomy of an internal 
 rectus muscle. Usually, an excellent cosmetic 
 result may be obtained by advancing the retracted 
 muscle, even after many years. Sometimes, how- 
 ever, the muscle is much atrophied from disuse. 
 
 The conjunctiva and capsule of Tenon will be 
 matted to the globe in the neighbourhood of the 
 former insertion of the muscle, or the eyeball may 
 be quite destitute of covering in this region. 
 Grasp the membranes, with toothed forceps, well 
 above or below the scarred area, and, with the 
 scissors, separate them from the nasal side of the 
 eye. A squint hook may be of assistance in this. 
 If the muscle is not found attached to some 
 portion of the anterior segment of the globe it 
 is of no use searching for it with a squint hook far 
 back. It is never found attached to the posterior 
 15 
 
214 OPERATIONS 
 
 hemisphere. Seize the coverings of the eye in 
 the region of the sunken caruncle, pull them 
 forward, lift them up. The muscle, or what 
 remains of it, will be seen on their under surface. 
 I think that, after tenotomy, the tendon fails to 
 become reattached directly to the globe far more 
 often than is generally supposed. If the muscle 
 be fairly good it may be advanced in the ordinary 
 way. If, however, it be much atrophied, a musculo- 
 capsular advancement is preferable. The muscle 
 and membranes are seized with toothed forceps 
 and drawn between the jaws of an advancement 
 forceps. The surface to which the muscle and 
 membranes are to be attached must be well 
 refreshed. 
 
 Tenotomy. 
 
 There are several slightly different methods of 
 performing this little operation. The following is 
 as good as any other. The instruments required 
 are speculum (fig. 29), straight blunt-pointed 
 scissors (fig. 34), tenotomy hook (fig. 35), and 
 fixation forceps (fig. 36). The patient lies on a 
 table. Both eyes are cocainised. The eye to be 
 operated upon is irrigated with sterilised saline 
 solution, and a drop of supra-renal extract is 
 instilled. In operating on the left internal rectus, 
 it is more convenient to stand in front, and on the 
 left of the patient. In tenotomising any of the 
 other recti, I prefer to stand behind the patient's 
 head. The speculum is inserted, if the muscle to 
 
OPERATIONS 2 15 
 
 be tenotomised be one of the external or internal 
 recti. In the case of a superior or inferior rectus, 
 the lids should be held open by the fingers of an 
 assistant. Tell the patient to look in a direction 
 opposite to that of the tendon to be divided, so as 
 to bring its insertion well forward. With the for- 
 ceps, pick up the conjunctiva over the insertion of 
 the tendon, and, with the scissors, make an incision, 
 about one-third of an inch long, in a direction at 
 right angles to that of the tendon. Now divide 
 the capsule of Tenon in the same way. This 
 brings the insertion of the tendon into view. 
 While the forceps still hold up the cut edge of the 
 capsule, make a few short snips with the scissors 
 near one border of the tendon, until the point of 
 the scissors is felt to slip freely back without 
 encountering any resistance. Now lay down the 
 scissors, and take up the hook in the right hand. 
 Pass the point of the hook into this incision, and 
 hook it round the insertion of the tendon, until 
 it appears at the other border. During this 
 manoeuvre, the point of the hook should be kept 
 in contact with the sclerotic. Now lay down the 
 forceps, and transfer the hook to the left hand. 
 Take care to avoid any dragging with the hook, 
 as this causes pain. With the scissors, cut 
 between the point of the hook and the globe, 
 until the tendon is divided at its insertion, and 
 the hook comes away. It is usual to reintroduce 
 the hook, to seek for any fibres of insertion which 
 
2l6 OPERATIONS 
 
 may have escaped division. It is not necessary 
 or advisable to suture the conjunctiva, unless the 
 conjunctival incision is unusually large. 
 
 After the operation, there is a very considerable 
 defect of movement in the direction of action of 
 the tenotomised muscle. This, to some extent, 
 subsequently disappears. The average effect of a 
 tenotomy of the internal rectus is 13 , and of the 
 other recti less than half this amount. But it 
 varies within extremely wide limits. 
 
 A pad and bandage should be worn for the first 
 forty-eight hours, after which it may be discarded. 
 The eye should be bathed with boric lotion, three 
 or four times a day, until the wound is healed. 
 
 Complete central tenotomy . — In America, partial 
 tenotomies are very commonly performed. I 
 believe these to be useless, as, until the whole of 
 the tendon proper has been divided, no appre- 
 ciable effect is produced. But the neat and 
 precise method by which these partial tenotomies 
 are performed is very well worth copying. By 
 this method, the tendon itself may be completely 
 divided, leaving its lateral expansions absolutely 
 intact. 
 
 The patient is prepared as for an ordinary teno- 
 tomy. The forceps, scissors, and tenotomy hook 
 required are those of Stevens (figs. 40, 3$, and 39). 
 The surgeon, standing behind the patient's head, 
 seizes, with the forceps, the conjunctiva over the 
 tendon near its insertion. A transverse incision 
 
OPERATIONS 
 
 217 
 
 of sufficient length is made through the con- 
 junctiva. The capsule of Tenon is now similarly 
 incised, to an extent just sufficient to expose the 
 
 tendon. The central fibres of the tendon are 
 next grasped by the forceps, and a button-hole is 
 snipped through the tendon with the scissors. 
 The forceps being laid aside, the small tenotomy 
 
2l8 OPERATIONS 
 
 hook is introduced through this button-hole, with 
 its point turned towards one border of the tendon, 
 Half the tendon is cautiously snipped through on 
 the hook, from the centre towards the edge. The 
 point of the hook is now turned round, and the 
 other half of the tendon similarly divided. 
 
 When the hook is first introduced through the 
 button-hole, on lifting it up, the tension of the 
 tendon is felt. When the whole of the tendon 
 proper has been divided, considerable tension is 
 still felt, by means of the hook, at the edges 
 of the wound. This resistance is due to the 
 lateral expansions of the tendon. These should 
 on no account be divided, as it is upon the pre- 
 servation of these lateral expansions that the 
 safety of this operation depends. Sometimes it 
 is impossible to define exactly the edge of the 
 tendon, owing to its gradually merging into its 
 lateral expansions. In such a case, one has to be 
 guided by the degree of tension felt by the hook. 
 
 No after-treatment is required beyond frequent 
 bathing with boric lotion or sterilised saline 
 solution. 
 
 This operation appears to be a safe one when 
 judiciously employed, but the effect produced by 
 it is small— about 6° or y° in the case of the 
 internal rectus, and 3 in the case of the superior 
 rectus. It varies very little in different cases, and 
 shows no tendency to increase with time. I have 
 usually seen a slight decrease after a few weeks. 
 
219 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Congenital Amblyopia. 
 
 Table VI. shows the degrees of refractive error and 
 the visual acuity in the twenty-three cases of congenital 
 amblyopia described in Chapter V. 
 
 Table VI. 
 
 Better Eve. 
 
 Worse Eye. 
 
 Refractive error. 
 
 Vision. 
 
 Refractive error. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Vision. 
 
 Lower 
 
 Higher 
 
 
 Lower 
 
 Higher 
 
 
 meridian. 
 
 meridian. 
 
 
 meridian. 
 
 meridian. 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 1 
 
 t 
 
 + 2-5 
 
 + 4 
 
 A 
 
 — 0-5 
 
 O 
 
 | 
 
 -0-5 
 
 + 4-5 
 
 A 
 
 + T5 
 
 + i-5 
 
 § 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 ft 
 
 — i"5 
 
 + 2 
 
 s 
 
 — 2 
 
 + 2-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 1 
 
 6 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 5 
 
 A 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 1-25 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 + 5-25 
 
 A 
 
 + L25 
 
 + 1-25 
 
 § 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 7 
 
 A 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + i-5 
 
 1 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 6-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 4 
 
 I 
 
 + 5-5 
 
 + 8-5 
 
 * 
 
 + o- 5 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 f 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 1 
 
 35 
 
 + o-5 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 6 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 6 
 
 A 
 
 + i 
 
 + 1-25 
 
 f 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 4-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 + 3'5 
 
 | 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 6-5 
 
 A 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + 175 
 
 § 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + 475 
 
 A 
 
 + o- 5 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 6_ 
 
 — 1 
 
 + 3 
 
 A 
 
 + i 
 
 + 1 
 
 | 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 4 
 
 ft 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 6-5 
 
 ft 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 6 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 7 
 
 A 
 
 + i 
 
 + 1 
 
 8 
 
 — i'5 
 
 + 2-5 
 
 ft 
 
 + 075 
 
 + 1 
 
 9 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 5-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 2 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 6-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 9 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 4-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 0-25 
 
 + 075 
 
 I 
 
 + T5 
 
 + 5-5 
 
 ft 
 
220 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 Table VII. shows the refractive error and the visual 
 acuity of the eleven cases in Table III., Chapter V., 
 which had an amblyopia of T 6 « or higher. The visual 
 defect in these cases also is almost certainly congenital. 
 
 Table VII. 
 
 Fixing Eye. 
 
 Deviating Eye. 
 
 Refractive error. 
 
 Vision. 
 
 Refractive error. 
 
 
 Lower 
 
 Higher 
 
 Higher 
 
 Lower 
 
 Vision. 
 
 Meridian. 
 
 Meridian. 
 
 
 Meridian. 
 
 Meridian. 
 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 2 
 
 | 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + 5-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 3"5 
 
 + 4 
 
 5 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 + 6 
 
 A 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + i-5 
 
 § 
 
 + i-5 
 
 + 5 
 
 A 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 4'5 
 
 1 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 5-25 
 
 & 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 3 
 
 S 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 7 
 
 & 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 1 
 
 I 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 A 
 
 + 2-5 
 
 + 3 
 
 ? 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 + J5 
 
 A 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 3 
 
 I 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 + 7'5 
 
 A 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 + 0-5 
 
 f 
 
 — 1 
 
 + 275 
 
 A 
 
 + 275 
 
 + 3-5 
 
 g 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 5"5 
 
 A 
 
 + 1-25 
 
 + 1-25 
 
 6 
 
 + 4-5 
 
 + 8-5 
 
 A 
 
 Prisms and Decentred Lenses. 
 
 There are several systems of numbering prisms. In 
 ordering a prism it is necessary, therefore, to specify 
 which system one uses. In this book the strength of 
 a prism is expressed by the number of degrees which 
 it deflects a ray of light. This " deviating power " is 
 about half the geometrical angle (the angle between 
 the two plane surfaces). 
 
 A prism causes mal-projection, and chromatic dis- 
 persion of white light. Clinically, mal-projection is 
 avoided by dividing the prism between the two eyes. 
 For instance, in a case of right hyperphoria 2 , if one 
 wished to correct l£° of the error, one would order a 
 prism : , ! ° apex up, before the right eye, and a prism 
 of the same strength, apex down, before the left eye. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 221 
 
 Chromatic dispersion is not noticeable in a prism which 
 does not exceed 2° deviating power. 
 
 A pencil of parallel rays which traverses a spherical 
 lens at its optical centre, is made convergent or diver- 
 gent. A pencil of rays, traversing a lens towards its 
 periphery, is deflected in addition (as by a prism) 
 towards the axis of a convex lens away from the axis 
 of a concave lens. 
 
 Glasses containing prisms in combination with 
 spherical and cylindrical lenses are expensive, because 
 they must be specially ground — the optician cannot 
 prepare them from his stock. But if the patient has 
 to wear fairly strong lenses, and if the required pris- 
 matic effect is small, this may be secured by decentring 
 the spectacle glass. That is, the optician, instead of 
 cutting the spectacle glass from the middle of one of 
 his ready-ground lenses, cuts it from one side. This 
 is much cheaper. The effect of decentring a cylin- 
 drical lens, in a direction at right angles to its axis, 
 is the same as that of decentring a spherical lens. In 
 a lens of the ordinary stock size, there is room to 
 decentre a medium-sized spectacle glass about 3 mm., 
 i.e., a total of 6 mm. in the two eyes. 
 
 The following table, prepared from Dr. Maddox's 
 formula, shows the prismatic effect of decentring 
 lenses. 
 
 
 2 mm. 
 
 3 mm. 
 
 4 mm. 
 
 5 mm. 
 
 6 mm. 
 
 2 D. 
 
 14' 
 
 21' 
 
 27' 
 
 35' 
 
 41' 
 
 3 D. 
 
 2l' 
 
 31' 
 
 41' 
 
 52' 
 
 1° 2 
 
 4 D. 
 
 27' 
 
 41' 
 
 55' 
 
 i° 10 
 
 1° 22' 
 
 5 D. 
 
 35' 
 
 52' 
 
 i° 10' 
 
 i° 26' 
 
 i°43' 
 
 6 D. 
 
 4i' 
 
 1° 2' 
 
 i° 22' 
 
 i°43' 
 
 2° 4' 
 
 7 D- 
 
 48' 
 
 1° 12' 
 
 i°36' 
 
 2° 
 
 2° 24' 
 
 8 D 
 
 55' 
 
 1° 22' 
 
 i°5° 
 
 2° I 9 ' 
 
 2 45' 
 
222 appendix 
 
 Results of Fusion Training. 
 
 In the earlier cases I had not perfected my methods 
 of fusion training, and in recent cases sufficient time 
 has not yet elapsed to show that the results are per- 
 manent. I therefore give the results of fusion training 
 in ioo consecutive cases, beginning January, 1896. 
 Five were what 1 have called essentially alternating 
 squints, in which I was unable to get even simulta- 
 neous vision of the two object slides. In 17 cases the 
 patients were more than 6 years of age. I got a 
 moderately good result in two of these, and failed in 
 the other 15. I scarcely ever now attempt fusion 
 training after 6 years of age. Of the remaining 78 
 cases, which alone were suitable for fusion training, 
 I failed in 12 cases (owing to intractability of patient, 
 irregularity of attendance, or apparent absence of the 
 power acquiring fusion) ; in seven cases the result was 
 only moderate, and in 59 cases a good amplitude of 
 fusion was developed. In two of these cases the 
 parents refused advancement which was necessary to 
 complete the cure ; four cases have been lost sight of ; 
 the remaining 53 cases are perfectly and permanently 
 cured. 
 
 Results of Advancement Operations. 
 
 In performing advancement I have, since 1898, 
 relied exclusively upon the method described in Chap- 
 ter XII. I therefore give results of 100 consecutive 
 advancement operations, beginning January, 1899. I 
 have re-examined most of these cases within the 
 present year (1906). 
 
 By primary advancement I mean advancement of 
 a muscle which had not previously been operated 
 upon. In some of these cases the opposing muscle 
 had previously been tenotomised by some other sur- 
 geon. By secondary advancement I mean operation 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 223 
 
 upon a muscle which had previously been tenotomised 
 or unsuccessfully advanced. 
 
 In cases in which the fusion sense has been fairly 
 well developed, but in which the deviation persists, 
 the object of operation is to put the eyes into such 
 a position that the patient will have binocular single 
 vision. If the fusion sense cannot be developed, one 
 aims at removing the visible deformity. Cases which 
 come up to this standard I have classified as success- 
 ful. Those which do not I have called unsuccessful, 
 although in all these cases there was considerable 
 improvement. 
 
 Eighty-six operations were performed under cocaine 
 and 14 under chloroform. 
 
 The 100 cases consisted of : — 
 
 Secondary 
 
 The 77 cases of primary advancement of external 
 rectus included one case of congenital paralysis of 
 external rectus and two cases in which the muscle 
 was atrophied. In these three cases, though a per- 
 fect result was not to be expected, musculo-capsular 
 advancement, combined with tenotomy of the oppos- 
 ing muscle, produced considerable improvement in 
 the appearance. 
 
 Of the 74 remaining primary advancements of 
 external rectus, 66 were successful ; in three other 
 cases a second operation 1 proved successful ; in one a 
 second operation was recommended but was refused ; 
 in four cases, though the results did not satisfy me, 
 
 1 I have not included these three cases in the list of secondary 
 advancements recorded below. 
 
 external 
 
 rectus 
 
 ... 77 
 
 internal 
 
 „ 
 
 8 
 
 inferior 
 
 „ 
 
 1 
 
 external 
 
 „ 
 
 4 
 
 internal 
 
 „ 
 
 9 
 
 superior 
 
 „ 
 
 1 
 
224 APPENDIX 
 
 the patients were quite satisfied, so, as there was no 
 fusion sense in any of these four cases, I did not urge 
 further operation. In 17 of these 74 cases the internal 
 rectus was tenotomised at the same time. 
 
 Of the eight primary advancements of internal 
 rectus, two were old myopic divergent squints, and 
 two were neuropathic divergent squints with some 
 fusion sense. These were successful. The remaining 
 four were neuropathic divergent squints with no 
 fusion sense. Considerable improvement in appear- 
 ance was produced in these four cases, but the results 
 were far from perfect (see p. 138). The external rectus 
 was not tenotomised in any case. 
 
 The primary advancement of inferior rectus was 
 in a case of vertical deviation of high degree with 
 absence of fusion sense. I succeeded in removing 
 the deformity. 
 
 The four secondary advancements of external rectus 
 were in cases in which some one had unsuccessfully 
 attempted advancement. In one case I succeeded. 
 In the other three the previous mutilation 1 of the parts 
 rendered a perfect result impossible. 
 
 The nine secondary advancements of the internal 
 rectus were all cases in which tenotomy of this muscle 
 had been followed by divergence of the eye. I was 
 responsible for two of these tenotomies. Five of these 
 secondary advancements were successful ; in three 
 the condition was improved ; in one there was no 
 improvement. 
 
 The secondary advancement of the superior rectus 
 has already been described (Case D, 227, p. 153). 
 
 1 If a suture lias been tied on the muscle, including its whole 
 width, the muscle in front of the ligature atrophies just as surely 
 as if it had been cut off with scissors. 
 
 If a surgeon in advancing a muscle has isolated it from its 
 overlyin- membranes and its Literal expansions, if one has to 
 operate again upon this muscle one finds a shapeless mat of 
 muscle and scar tissue. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 225 
 
 The Deviometer (p. 89). 
 
 The patient's eye is only two feet from the instru- 
 ment. In looking at the button above the light he 
 will, therefore, exercise a dynamic convergence pro- 
 portionate to that distance. It has often been sug- 
 gested to me that this would cause the degree of a 
 convergent squint to appear greater than it really is. 
 This is not the case, because the surgeon's eye is at 
 the same distance, just above the zero of the scale. 
 This is easily demonstrated by experiment with a 
 normal-sighted person. When he looks at the button 
 both visual axes converge to this point. The surgeon 
 places his eye at the same distance — just above the 
 button — so that he sees the vertical lines of light 
 occupying symmetrical positions on the corneas of 
 the observed person, showing that the latter has no 
 squint. If the observed person could look at the 
 button with one eye, without exercising any dynamic 
 convergence (keeping his visual axes parallel), he 
 would appear to the surgeon to have a divergent 
 squint — in fact, he would have a divergent squint for 
 that distance. 
 
 No adjustments are required except that the 60 cm. 
 string must be kept taut. As the scale is flat, instead 
 of a curved arc, a slight lateral movement on the part 
 of the patient introduces no appreciable error. The 
 height of the patient's eyes above the tables makes no 
 difference. 
 
 Details of construction. The woodwork can be made 
 by any carpenter for a few shillings. The following 
 measurements have been found satisfactory : — 
 
 The pedestal, 10 inches wide, 5 inches deep, from 
 before backwards, i\ inches high. 
 
 The upright board, height 13 \ inches (11 inches 
 above pedestal), width 5 inches, thickness f inch. 
 
 The arm is pivoted at one end by a bolt which 
 passes through the upright board. There is a chock on 
 
226 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 each side, on one of which it rests. It is swung over 
 to either side as required. This arm is of hard wood, 
 27 inches long, 2 inches wide, T \ inch thick. It is 
 painted black in front. A long strip of white paper or 
 celluloid, about half an inch wide, has marked on it the 
 tangents to degrees at the distance of 60 cm. This 
 strip is pasted on the back of the arm, with the zero 
 of the scale at the pivot hole. 
 
 The tangents to degrees at 60 cm. are — 
 
 2*1 cm. 
 
 4'2 „ 
 
 6-3 „ 
 
 8-4 „ 
 
 io-6 „ 
 
 12-8 „ 
 
 15 » 
 
 I7'2 „ 
 
 18° 
 
 20° 
 ■79° 
 
 24°- 
 26°- 
 
 28° • 
 
 30 
 
 19-5 cm. 
 
 21-8 „ 
 
 24-2 „ 
 
 267 „ 
 
 29-3 » 
 
 319 >. 
 
 ■347 „ 
 
 3TS » 
 
 34 — 40-5 cm. 
 
 3 6°-43-6 „ 
 
 38 — 46-9 „ 
 
 40 — 50-3 „ 
 
 42 — 54 » 
 
 44°— 57'9 ., 
 
 46 — 62-6 „ 
 
 48 — 667 „ 
 
 In inserting the bell push only one wire is cut, 
 the other being left intact. The instrument is made 
 by Messrs. Bonnella and Son, 58, Mortimer Street, 
 London, W. 
 
 Modifications of the Amblyoscopk. 
 
 Dr. ERNEST Maddox uses a quickly acting screw, 
 instead of the short slot in the brass arc. This ad- 
 mits of delicate adjustment, which is an advantage in 
 testing the horizontal breadth of fusion. 
 
 Dr. Freeland Fergus employs a method of illumi- 
 nating the object slides which is certainly more compact 
 than the apparatus shown in fig. 12, and is probably 
 equally efficacious. " Immediately behind the parts of 
 the Amblyoscope into which the pictures arc placed, 
 there is a stout metal collar from which a curved piece 
 of metal is carried in front of the pictures. To each 
 of the two pieces of metal an electric lamp of about 
 three-candle power is attached. From each of the two 
 lamps a lead is taken to a rheostat, so that the amount 
 of illumination of each is thoroughly under control." 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 227 
 
 Dr. Maitland Ramsay has substituted total-re- 
 flecting prisms for the mirrors (" Ophthalmoscope," 
 vol. 3). These are, of course, very perfect reflectors, 
 but very expensive. He has also devised an improved 
 lighting apparatus. " The lighting is arranged by 
 means of two small lamps, one fixed immediately 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
 Fig. 42 
 
 behind each picture in the Amblyoscope. The degree 
 of illumination is varied and regulated by a sliding 
 bridge-resistance, which can be adjusted most delicately 
 and which, while it takes resistance from the circuit of 
 one lamp and so increases its brightness, at the same 
 time throws more resistance into that of the other and 
 brings about corresponding diminution of its brilliancy. 
 
228 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 The illustrations show the arrangement, which has 
 been carried out by Mr. Trotter, 40, Gordon Street, 
 Glasgow." 
 
 Dr. Nelson Miles Black has added a vertical 
 screw adjustment, by means of which one tube can be 
 moved above or below the plane of the other, in order 
 more readily to adapt the instrument to cases of squint 
 in which there is a vertical deviation. By means of 
 this ingenious device, one may, in a case of obstinate 
 suppression, call attention to the second image by 
 temporarily throwing it above or below the plane of 
 the other. 
 
 Advancement Forceps. 
 
 Messrs. Weiss and Son have made for me an 
 advancement forceps on the Prince model, which 
 seems perfect. There are no spikes, the blades are 
 smooth and probe-pointed, so the instrument is as 
 
 KKSffllltar 
 
 Fig. 43- 
 
 easy to introduce as a tenotomy forceps. The catch 
 gives a firm grip and has not the same tendency as 
 the spring catch to get out of order. Only one forceps 
 is required. 
 
229 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Abduction 
 Abversion ... 
 
 ,, in cases of coir 
 Accommodation ... 
 
 ergent squint 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 180 
 4 
 
 27.49 
 1 
 
 and convergence, association between 
 
 Advancement 
 
 ,, musculo-capsular 
 
 secondary 
 ,, results of 
 
 Ad version ... 
 Etiology of convergent squint ... 
 
 ,, ,, author's proposition . 
 
 ., ,, ,, Donder's theory 
 
 ,, ,, ,, muscle theory 
 
 Amblyopia, acquired (amblyopia ex anopsia) ... 
 ,, ,, methods of curing 
 
 „ method of preventing 
 
 ,, congenital 
 
 „ in cases of convergent squint 
 
 Amblyoscope 
 
 as a test for binocular vision 
 ,, illuminating apparatus for 
 
 ,, object- slides for ... 
 
 Angle gamma 
 
 „ ,, method of measuring ... 
 
 Angle of deviation, methods of measuring 
 
 Anisometropia 
 
 ,, in convergent squint 
 
 „ predisposing to squint . . . 
 
 3 
 
 201 
 
 212 
 
 140,213 
 
 ... 222 
 
 4 
 
 48 
 
 54 
 
 50 
 
 ... 48 
 
 66, 77 
 
 103, 105 
 
 ... 105 
 
 63, 76, 219 
 
 34, 76, 220 
 
 120 
 
 16 
 
 122 
 
 123 
 
 5 
 
 94 
 
 Astigmatism 
 
 i6 
 
 in convergent squint 
 
 in congenitally amblyopic eyes 
 
 65: 
 
 5 
 47 
 57 
 
 5 
 45 
 220 
 
230 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Atropine, effect of ... ... ... ... ... 2 
 
 „ instilled into fixing eye only .. . ... ... 105 
 
 ,, long-continued use of, for both eyes causes 
 extreme amblyopia in the deviating eye 70, 109, 154 
 
 Binocular vision ... ... ... ... 7, 86 
 
 ,, ,, grades of ... ... ... ... 12 
 
 . r y .,, ,, in infancy ... ... ... ... 20 
 
 ,, ,, tests for ... ... ... ... 14 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 196 
 
 198 
 
 84 
 
 3 
 
 25 
 
 30 
 
 48 
 
 46, 47, 61, 116 
 
 ... 27 
 
 27, 28, 84 
 
 30,61 
 
 ... 60 
 
 Conjugate movements of the eyes in infancy .. 
 Convergence and accommodation, association between 
 ,, dynamic ... 
 
 ,, dynamic, insufficiency of 
 
 ,, dynamic, method of investigatin 
 
 ,, dynamic, method of investigating in a 
 
 case of squint ... 
 Convergence, static 
 Convergent squint 
 
 accidentally alternating 
 aetiology of ... 
 alternating ... 30, 42 
 conjugate movements in 
 dynamic convergence in 
 essentially alternating 
 hereditary influence in 
 measurement of the 
 deviation 
 Convergent squint, method of investigating a case of 
 ,, ,, method of investigating fixation of 
 
 deviating eye ... 
 Convergent squint, unilateral ... 
 
 unilateral, course of an untreated 
 
 case ... ... ... ... ... 
 
 Convergent squint, occasional ... 
 
 angle of 
 
 88 
 
 78 
 
 82 
 29 
 
 40 
 116 
 
 power of rotation of each eye 27, 49, 83 
 ,, ,, spontaneous " cure " of ... ... 39 
 
 ,, statistical tables showing visual 
 acuity of deviating eyes ... ... ... 76-77 
 
 Convergent squint, statistics showing age at which 
 the deviation appears ... ... ... ... ... 42 
 
INDEX 
 
 231 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Convergent squint, statistics showing refractive 
 
 error in ... ... ... ... ... 43 
 
 Convergent squint, the question of operation in ... in 
 
 ii ,, treatment of ... ... ... 97 
 
 Cover test for squint ... 79 
 
 Cyclophoria 166, et seq., 188 
 
 ,, experiments to explain the effect of ... 189 
 
 Decentration of lenses ... ... 220 
 
 Deviation, methods of measuring angle of ... ... 88 
 
 Deviometer ... ... ... ... ... 89, 225 
 
 Diplopia artificially produced 32, 87 
 
 ,, in convergent squint ... ... ... 32, 33 
 
 ,, monocular ... ... ... ... ... 36 
 
 ,, physiological ... ... ... 9 
 
 Divergence in extreme myopia... ... ... ... 138 
 
 ,, of blind eyes ... ... 139 
 
 ,, secondary to tenotomy ... ... 154, 139 
 
 Divergent squint, infantile myopic ... ... ... 136 
 
 ,, .» myopic . . ... ... ... 133 
 
 ,, ,, neuropathic... ... ... ... 136 
 
 Dynamic convergence (see " Convergence, Dynamic ") 
 ,, refraction (see " Refraction, Dynamic ") 
 
 Emmetropia ... ... ... ... 1 
 
 Esophoria... ... ... 166, et seq., 183 
 
 ,, mistaken for occasional convergent squint 
 
 29, 183, 194 
 Examination of a case of convergent squint ... ... 78 
 
 Exophoria ... ... ... ... 166, et seq., 185 
 
 False macula ... 36 
 
 Fevers, specific, preceding the appearance of a 
 
 deviation ... ... ... ... 58 
 
 Fixation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 
 
 ,, false ... ... ... ... 36 
 
 ,, in deviating eyes ... ... ... 35, 76, 77 
 
 ,, in infancy ... ... ... ... ... 20 
 
 lost 36, 77 
 
 ,, method of investigating ... ... ... 84 
 
 Four-dot test .., ... ,.. ,. 15 
 
232 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Fusion, amplitude of 
 
 ,, experiments showing elasticity of 
 
 ,, (see also " Binocular Vision ") 
 
 ,, sense, defect of, the fundamental cause of 
 
 PAGE 
 
 13. 129 
 10, 11 
 
 squint ... 
 Fusion sense, method of training 
 
 ,, ,, normal development of, in infancy 
 
 ,, training, results of 
 
 "Growing out of a Squint" 
 
 Hereditary influence in convergent squint 
 
 Hering's drop test 
 
 Heterophoria 
 
 Heterotropia ... 
 
 Hypermetropia ... 
 
 ,, causing a tendency 
 
 squint 
 
 Hypermetropia in convergent squint 
 Hyperphoria 
 
 55> 60 
 
 . 118 
 
 20 
 
 . 222 
 
 • 39 
 
 60 
 
 17 
 
 164 
 
 . 168 
 
 to convergent 
 
 50,56 
 
 43 
 
 166, et seq., 186 
 
 Infancy, central fixation in ... ... 20 
 
 ,, conjugate movements of the eyes in ... 20 
 
 ,, development of binocular vision in ... ... 20 
 
 Infants, spectacles for ... ... ... ... ioi, 102 
 
 spurious squint of ... ... ... .. 38 
 
 Insufficiency of dynamic convergence... ... ... 196 
 
 Investigation of a case of convergent squint ... ... 78 
 
 Ivory-ball test 85 
 
 Lenses, decentration of ... ... ... ... 220 
 
 Macula, false ... ... ... ... ... ... 36 
 
 Maddox double prism ... ... ... ... ... 172 
 
 ,, rod 170 
 
 ,, tangent scale 91, 172 
 
 Mirror test for convergent squint ... ... 80 
 
 Muscular balance of the eyes, methods of investigating 169 
 
 Myopia 5» 43 
 
 Myopic divergent squint ... ... ... ... 133 
 
 Neuropathic divergent squint 
 
 1 36 
 
INDEX 233 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Occlusion of fixing eye ... ... 103 
 
 Operation in cases of convergent squint 
 
 in, 144, 145, 148, 157, 159 
 
 Operations on the external ocular muscles 201 
 
 Optical correction in cases of convergent squint ... 98 
 Orthophoria I °4 
 
 Paralysis of external rectus muscle ... 33, 59, 81 
 
 Perimeter method of measuring deviations 93 
 
 Peripheral form vision, method of testing ... ... 64 
 
 Perspective, sense of 13, I7> I 3° 
 
 Phorometer .. ... ... ... 181 
 
 Physiological diplopia 9 
 
 Presbyopia ... ... ... •■• ••• ••• 2 
 
 Prism duction 179 
 
 Prisms and decentred lenses ... ... ... ••• 220 
 
 Pseudo-heterophoria ... ... ... 166 
 
 Refraction, dynamic ... ... ••• 2 
 
 ,, investigation of ... ... ... ••• 95 
 
 ,, static ... ... ... ••• ••• ! 
 
 Refractive error, correction of, in convergent squint 98 
 ,, ,, „ in divergent squint .. 135 
 
 ,, ,, ,, in heterophoria ... 166 
 
 ,, ,, ,, in infants ... 98. 102, 151 
 
 ,, ,, in cases of convergent squint ... 43 
 
 ,, ,, ,, divergent squint 133, 137 
 
 Results of advancement operations 222 
 
 ,, ,, fusion training ... •• 222 
 
 Simultaneous macular perception ... 13, 128 
 
 Smith, tape method of Priestley 9 2 
 
 Spurious squint of infants ... ... ... ••• 3& 
 
 Squint, convergent (see "Convergent Squint") 
 Squint, divergent (see " Divergent Squint ") 
 
 or paralysis, differential diagnosis ... ... 81 
 
 ,, relative frequency of ... ... ... ••• 47 
 
 Static convergence ... ... ... 3 
 
 ,, refraction ... ... ... ... ••• ••• r 
 
 Subduction 180 
 
 Subversion ... ... ... ••• 3 
 
 Superduction ,,, ;rr ... ,,, ,,, ••» J 80 
 
234 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Superversion ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 
 
 Suppression of the vision of the squinting eye ... 31 
 
 Tangent scale of Maddox ... ... ... 91, 172 
 
 Tenotomy... ... ... ... ... ... 111, 214 
 
 ,, complete central ... ... ... ... 216 
 
 ,, divergence caused by ... 139, 154, 213 
 
 Vertical deviation, apparent ... ... ... 37 
 
 ,, ,, true ... ... ... ... 38 
 
 Vision, binocular (see " Binocular Vision ") 
 
 Visual acuity, method of investigating ... ... 85 
 
 of deviating eyes ... ... ...76,77 
 
 ,, ,, peripheral, method of investigating ... 64 
 
 Visual axis 3 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 OPTOMETRY LIBRARY 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 n0 V 2 9 1965 
 
 
 WAY 2 3 1986 
 
 
 MAY 2 3 1968 
 i 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 
 AT£ E--t^i 
 
 
 "I _ . . r; 'fZ-^f 
 
 
 JAN—-*' r:C J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tt-vo, m r .=n General Library 
 
 I 8i£SSSlA 9 to a«- 
 
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 1 
 
 CDD5bS77SS 
 

 Wmk HI